Meghmani Pigment

UID: GCI/EIA/FR/A (5F)/G003-21/2021-22/R1/4
Dated 12th April, 2021
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT
MANUFACTURING OF ORGANIC PIGMENTS
BY
M/s. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LTD
Plot No.:20, 21, 21/1 GIDC Estate, Phase-IV
Panoli,Dist: - Bharuch, State: Gujarat.
APRIL-2021
Baseline Period: March 2018 to May 2018
Conducted & Prepared by
GREEN CIRCLE, INC.
Integrated HSEQR Consulting Engineers, Scientists & Trainers

An ISO: 9001, ISO: 14001, ISO: 45001 Certified Organization
CORPORATE OFFICE: Green Empire (Anupushpam), Beside Canara Bank, Nr. Yash Complex,
Above Axis Bank, Gotri Main Road, VADODARA – 390 021, (Gujarat), India
E-mail: [email protected]:
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
WE EXPRESS OUR SINCERE THANKS TO MANAGEMENT & EMPLOYEES OF M/S

MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED LOCATED AT PLOT NO. 20, 21 21/1, GIDC ESTATE,
PHASE-IV, PANOLI, AND DISTRICT: BHARUCH, GUJARAT. FOR THEIR CO-OPERATION &
UNSTINTED HELP WITHOUT WHICH THE EIA REPORT FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION
PROJECT “MANUFACTURING OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICAL” COULD NOT HAVE
BEEN POSSIBLE. THE COURTESY EXTENDED TO OUR TEAM IS HIGHLY APPRECIATED.
ii
UNDERTAKING
I, Pradeep Joshi, Proprietor of Green Circle Inc. located at Green Empire (Anupushpam),
Above Axis Bank, Near Yash Complex, Gotri Main Road, Vadodara- 390021, do hereby
undertake that we have prepared EIA report for M/s Meghmani Organics Limited Located
At Plot No. 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-Iv, Panoli, And District: Bharuch, Gujarat, as
per Terms of Reference (ToR) prescribed wide Letter No.: No.IA-J-11011/194/2020-IA-
II(I). The stated ToRs have been complied and the data mentioned in the EIA report are
factually correct.
The above stated fact is true to the best of my knowledge.
Date: 08.04.2021
For: Green Circle Inc.
Place: Vadodara
iii
DISCLAIMER
The consulting services conducted by Green Circle, Inc. (the “Company”) were performed
using generally accepted guidelines, standards, and/or practices, which the Company
considers reliable. Although the Company performed its consulting services pursuant to
reliable and generally accepted practices in the industry, the Company does not
guarantee or provide any representations or warranties with respect to Client’s use,
interpretation or application of the findings, conclusions, and/or suggestions of the
consulting services provided by the Company. Moreover, the findings, conclusions, and
the suggestions resulting from the consulting service are based upon certain
assumptions, information, documents, and procedures provided by the Customer. AS
SUCH, IN NO EVENT AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCE SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE
FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LOST REVENUE OR PROFITS OF
THE CUSTOMER OR ITS CUSTOMERS, AGENTS AND DISTRIBUTORS, RESULTING FROM,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH, THE SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
COMPANY.
The Customer agrees that the Company shall have no liability for damages, which may
result from Client’s use, interpretation or application of the consulting services provided
by the Company. Client’s logo has been used for report purpose only.
iv
AUTHORIZATION LETTER
I undersigned Mr. Anand Patel, Director of M/s Meghmani Organics Limited Located At Plot
No. 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli, And District: Bharuch, Gujarat to represent
our online proposal for obtaining Environment Clearance (EC), give presentation and give
commitments/assurance before MoEF during appraisal of said proposal in scheduled
meeting on my behalf.
I shall abide to commitments/assurance given by Green Circle Inc. before MoEF during
appraisal of said proposal.
Date: 09/04/2021 Name of Director- Mr. Anand Patel

Place: Bharuch
Signature: _________
COMPLIANCE OF OFFICE MEMORANDUM
Sr. Environment Mitigation Measures Compliance

No.
1 Air i) Stack emission level should be stringent We may inform you that we are
than the existing standards in terms of using coal as a fuel in boiler and
the identified critical pollutants. TFH. As an mitigation measures,
we have already provided ESP.
We have also put CEMS to keep
the record. In existing our
parameter values is 80% of the
existing standards.
ii) CEMS may be installed in all large / We have already installed CEMS.
medium red category industries (Air
polluting) and connected to SPCB
and
CPCB server.
iii) Effective fugitive emission control Raw materials will be stored in
measures should be imposed in the isolated storage area and
process, transportation, packing etc.containers will be kept tightly
closed.
To minimize fugitive emission,
powder material will be allowed in
a vessel through closed loop while
liquid material will be charged
through closed pipeline.
Manufacturing activity will be
carried out in closed reactors /
vessels and regular checking and
maintenance of the same will be
carried out to avoid any leakages.
Sr. Source Probable Control Measures/ APCM
No. Pollutant
Emission
FUGITIVE EMISSION
1 Handling of Air pollutant i) Provision of exhaust ventilation
raw material (PM) ii) Provision of PPE.
bags in iii) Provision of Job rotation to
storage area reduce exposure.
2 Solid raw Air pollutant Hopper will be provided with
material (PM) powder transfer system.
transferring
to reactor
3 Solvent Air Pollutant i) Solvent recovery system with

Recovery (VOC) steam condensation system.
System ii) Pump & motors are mechanical
seal type.
4 Solvent Air Pollutant i) Carry out workplace area

storage (VOC) monitoring to find out concentration
Area level in ambient air close handling
system.
5 Flange joints Air pollutant i) Routine &periodic inspection to

of pipeline, (VOC) check leakage.
pump & ii) Preventive maintenance,
motors FollowSOP for maintenance.
iii) Pumps & motors will be
mechanical seal type.
iv) LDAR program will be followed.
Provision of Flange guard.
6 Liquid raw Air pollutant Feeding of liquid raw material will
material (VOC) be carried out by closed pipeline
transferring andmechanical seal pump.
to reactor
7 Loading Air pollutant Unloading through pipeline to tank in
/unloading at (VOC) a close system.
storage area
iv) Transportation of materials by Will be complied.
rail/conveyor belt, wherever feasible.
v) Encourage use of cleaner fuels (pet We are using coal.
coke/ furnace oil/ LSHS may be
avoided).
vi) Best available technology may be Unit has adopted best available
used. For example usages of technology to reduce pollution and
EAF/SAF/IF in place of Cupola achieve maximum yield during
furnace. Usage of supercritical production. We are also converting
technology in place of sub-critical ammonium carbonate solution
technology. to ammonium sulfate. We also
isolate copper from effluent and
convert it into copper sulfate etc.
vii) Increase of green belt cover by 40 % We have already developed 32%
of the total land area beyond the green belt area of total plot area.
permissible requirement of 33% Our frame line to comply this
wherever feasible. activity is as under.
viii) Stipulation of greenbelt outside the The unit will develop total 8504
project premises such as avenue Sq.mt area outside the premises
plantation, plantation in vacant within first year of getting EC.
areas, social forestry, etc.
PLANTATION WITHIN THE PREMISES
Plantation Required In Area 39600 Sq meter (40% of total plot
area- 99002 Sq.mt)
Existing Green Belt Area 31096 Sq meter (32% of total plot
area)
Proposed additional green belt area 8504 Sq meter (8% of total plot
area) (Outside Premises)
Amount (INR) to develop green 10 Lacks
additional green belt area
ix) Assessment of carrying capacity of Pucca road provided within
transportation load on roads inside industrial premises having
the industrial premises. If the roads adequate carrying capacity and
required to be widened, shall be well maintaining it.
prescribed as a condition.
2 Water i) Reuse / recycle of treated Unit will internally recycle 250
wastewater,Wherever feasible. KLD.
ii) Continuous monitoring of effluent Complied.

quality / quantity in large and
medium red category industries
(water polluting).
iii) A detailed water harvesting plan may Unit will provide Rain water
be submitted by the project harvesting system at
proponent. surrounding village in study area.
iv) Zero liquid discharge wherever Unit will maintain existing
techno economically feasible. discharge.
v) In case, domestic waste water Domestic effluent will be going
generation is more than 10 KLD, the along with industrial effluent.
industry may install STP.
3 Land i) Increase of green belt cover by 40 % Point are covered above.
of the total land area beyond the
permissible requirement of 33%,
wherever, feasible for new projects.
ii) Stipulation of greenbelt outside the
project premises such as avenue
plantation, plantation in vacant areas,
social forestry, etc.
iii) Dumping of waste (fly ash slag, red Unit is dumping waste at
mud, etc.) may be permitted only at designated location approved by
designated location approved by SPCBs / PCCs.
SPCBs / PCCs. Unit will continue the same for
additional waste.
iv) More stringent norms for The unit is sending high calorific
management of hazardous waste. value waste to co-processing.
The
waste generated should be
preferablyutilized in co processing.
4 Other i) Monitoring of compliance of EC Unit will submit compliance of EC
conditions conditions may be submitted with conditions certified by third party
(Additional) third party audit every year. audit every year.
ii) The % of the CER may be at least 1.5 Fund allotted for CER activity will
times the slabs given in the OM dated be 2% of additional capital
01. 05. 2018 for SPA and 2 times for investment (Brownfield Field
CPA in case of Environmental project).
Clearance.
CER ACTIVITIES WILL BE CARRIED
OUT FOR 5 Years
FY FY FY FY FY
Sr. Activities Name of Total
2020 2021 202 202 202
No. theVillage / (Lakh)
- - 22 2 3 4
Place
21 - 23 - 24 - 25
Installation
1 and 12 2 2 2 2 20
maintenance
of Solar
Street Vicinity
Light Villages
(Kosamadi,
2 Installation of Bhadi, 20 3 3 2 2 30
RO plant Bhadkodra)
16 1 1 1 1 20
3 Rain water
harvesting plan
48 6 6 5 5 70
Total
Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV,
Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat for the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals with
total 2425 MT/Month
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction…………………………………………………………01
Chapter 2 Project Description………………………………………………...15
Chapter 3 Description of the Environment……………………… ………….75
Chapter 4 Anticipated Impacts & Mitigation Measures……………………123
Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives…………………………………………..154
Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Program……………………………….156
Chapter 7 Addition Studies…………………………………………………...164
Chapter 8 Project Benefits…………………………………………………...227
Chapter 9 Environment Cost Benefit Analysis……………………………..231
Chapter 10 Environment Management Plan……………………………….232
Chapter 11 Summary & Conclusion…………………………………………253
Chapter 12 Disclosure of Consultants………………………………………261
PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. i
NABET/EIA/1720/IA0029
total 2425 MT/Month
List of Annexure
ANNEXURE NAME
Annexure
No.
I Consent before 2008 and production data since the inception of the unit
II Standard Tor
III Plant Layout
IV Land Possession Document
V GIDC Fresh Water Permission Letter
VI TSDF Site Certificate
VII Monitoring Date
VIII EHS Policy
IX Onsite-Offsite Emergency Plan
X Client Undertaking
XI CER Activity Letter
XII Existing Green Belt Letter
XIII Raw Ambient Data
XIV Consultant NABET Order

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. ii
total 2425 MT/Month
Structure of the Report
Chapter 1 (Introduction): This chapter describes objectives and methodology for EIA.
Chapter 2 (Project Description): This chapter gives a brief description of the location, approachability, manufacturing
processes, and details of raw materials, amenities, layout and utilities of the
proposed project.
Chapter 3 (Description of the This chapter presents details of the baseline environmental status for microclimate,
Environment): air quality, noise, traffic, water quality, soil quality, flora, fauna and socio-economic
status etc.
Chapter 4 (Anticipated This chapter discusses the possible sources of pollution and environmental impacts
Environmental Impact and due to the project during construction and operation phases and suggests the
Mitigation Measures): mitigation measures.
Chapter 5 (Analysis of This chapter covers analysis of technology alternatives and site alternatives.
Alternatives):
Chapter 6 (Environmental This chapter discusses the details about the environmental monitoring program
Monitoring Programme): during construction and operation phases.
Chapter 7 (Additional Studies): This chapter covers information about Risk Assessment Studies for the construction
and operation phase, the safety precautions that are taken during construction phase
and Disaster Management Plan and Emergency Preparedness Plan onsite and
offsite.
Chapter 8 (Project Benefits): This chapter presents the benefits from this project.
Chapter 9 (Environmental Cost If recommended by EAC at the scoping stage, this chapter shall include the
Benefit Analysis) Environmental Cost benefit Analysis of the project.
Chapter 10 (Environmental This chapter deals with the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for the
Management Plan): proposed Project and indicates measures proposed to minimize the likely impacts on
the environment during construction and operation phases and budgetary allocation
for the same.
Chapter 11 (Conclusion): This chapter presents the conclusion made by the project proponent and developer.
Chapter 12 (Disclosure of This chapter presents the details of the consultant.

Consultants engaged):

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. iii
total 2425 MT/Month
List of Abbreviations
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

MoEF&CC Ministry of Environment Forest & Climate Change
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
ToR Terms of Reference
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
D. G Set Diesel Generator Set
TFH Thermic Fluid Heater
EMP Environment Management Plan
EAC Environment Appraisal Committee
DGFT Directorate General of Foreign Trade
NH National Highway
EC Environment Clearance
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
APC Air Pollution Control
KVA Kilo Volt Ampere
PM Particulate Matte
SO2 Sulphur Dioxide
NOX Oxides of Nitrogen
DO Dissolved Oxygen
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
pH Power Of Hydrogen
BGL Below Ground Level
LPM Liters Per Minute
AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standards
dB Decibel
GW Ground Water
NTU Nephlometric Unit
Mg/L Milligram Per Liter
SW Surface Water
µS/cm Micro siemens Per Centimeter
mg/kg Milligram Per Kilogram
PCU Passenger Car Unit
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
CETP Common Effluent Treatment Plant
CSR Cooperate Social Responsibility
NOC No Objection Certificate
CC&A Consolidated Con & Authorization
NABL National Accredited
CER Cooperate Environment Responsibility
QRA Quantitative Risk Assessment
MCLS Maximum Credible Loss Scenario
BLEVE Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapor Explosion
VCE Vapor Cloud Explosion
TLV Threshold Limit Value
STEL Short Term Exposure Limit
IDLH Immediately Dangerous to Life Or Health
EMS Environmental Management Systems
EHS Environmental, Health And Safety

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. iv
total 2425 MT/Month
EMC Environmental Management Cell

PPE Personal Protective Equipment
TSDF Transport Storage Disposal Facility
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
MSIHC Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules
ToR & Its Compliance
Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

No. Status
Standard ToR prescribed by MoEF&CC
1. Executive Summary Brief summary of the project regarding of Executive summary is
Air, Water & Hazardous is prepared. covered in chapter 11
from page no. 253 to
260.
2. Introduction
i. Details of the EIA Consultant NABET Accredited consultant: Attached as Annexure-
including NABET accreditation Green Circle Inc. Vadodara (Gujarat) XIV.
ii. Information about the project Director : Mr. Anand Patel Detail is covered
proponent under topic no. 1.2 on
page no. 4 of chapter 1.
iii. Importance and benefits of the Pigment industry plays an important role Detail is covered
project in the economic development of the under topic no. 2.7
country. The Indian Dyestuff Industry, on
page no. 71 of chapter
which was primarily started to cater to
2.
the needs of domestic textile industry,
now not only meets more than 95%
requirement of the domestic market, but
has gradually also made a dent in the
global market.
Project benefits focus on those points

which become beneficial to the
surrounding area or community in terms
of infrastructural development, Social
development, employment and other
tangible benefits due to project.
Proposed project has a potential for
employment of skilled, semi-skilled and
unskilled employees during construction
phase as well as operational phase.
3. Project Description
i. Cost of project and time of Total cost of the project is INR 35.70 Details of cost of
completion. crore. The project will be completed project are covered
within 12-18 months from the date of under topic no. 1.5.1
grant of EC.
on page no. 8 of
chapter 1.
Details of time of

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. v
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
completion is covered
under topic no. 2.7.1
from page no. 71 of
chapter-2.
ii. Products with capacities for the Expansion leads increase in existing Details are covered
proposed project. capacity from 175 to 2425 MT/M under topic no. 1.1 on
page no. 2 of chapter 1.
iii. If expansion project, details of The total production capacity of the Details are covered
existing products with capacities project will be 2425 MT/Month. (Existing under topic no. 1.1 on
and whether adequate land is capacity is 175 MT/M). page no. 2 of chapter
available for expansion, reference Unit has adequate area for the process
1. The unit is having
of earlier EC if any. and Storage of proposed products, raw
material storage and hazardous waste sufficient land.
storage, also adequate space for ETP
has been demarcated.
iv. List of raw materials required and All Raw materials will be purchased from Detail of raw materials
their source along with mode of Local market by Road transportation. is covered under topic
transportation. no. 2.3.2 from page
no. 16.
Detail of source along
with mode of
transportation is
covered under topic
no.
2.3.3 from page no. 18
to 20 of chapter 2.
v. Other chemicals and materials - Details of other
required with quantities and storage chemicals and
capacities materials required
with quantities and
storage capacities are
vi. Details of Emission, effluents, Mostly emission will be occurred through Details
coveredof under
emission is
topic
hazardous waste generation and Boiler & TFH. The DG set will be covered under topic
no. 2.3.3
their management. provided for the emergency purpose no
only. from2.5.4
page inno.table
18 tono
20
2.10 on page
of chapter 2. no 53.
The wastewater is being sent to M/s.
NCTL- FETP. Details of effluent
Generated hazardous waste-ETP generation is covered
sludge/Evaporator Residue disposed to in
TSDF, Process-residue disposed to co- 2.6.1.1 on page no 56.
processing/ CHWTSDF.
vii. Requirement of water, power, with Source of water will be GIDC. Detail of water and
source of supply, status of water balance diagram
approval, water balance diagram, Power source will be procured from is covered under topic
man-power requirement (regular DGVCL. no. 2.5.2 from page
and contract) no. 50 & 51 of chapter
There will be required total 815 people 2.
for project activity.
DGVCL is a source of

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. vi
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
power. Power supply
detail is covered in
topic no 2.5.3. Man-
power requirement is
covered under topic
no. 2.5.6 on page no
55 in chapter 2.
viii. Process description along with There will be major equipments like Detail of process
major equipment’s and different types of reaction vessels, description with
machineries, process flow sheet dryers, boiler, cooling tower etc, for process flow sheet is
(quantative) from raw material to manufacturing of products.
covered under topic
products to be provided
no. 2.4 on page no 21
in chapter 2.
Detail of major
equipment and
machineries
is covered under
topic. 2.5.5 on page
no 54 in chapter 2.
ix. Hazard identification and details of There will be taken necessary steps for Detail is covered in
proposed safety systems. prevention of major accident and safety Chapter 7 on page no
purpose. 164.
x. Expansion/modernization proposals:
c. Copy of all the Environmental Noted. Not applicable. First
Clearance(s) including time unit is applying
Amendments thereto obtained for for EC.
the project from MOEF/SEIAA shall
be attached as an Annexure. A
certified copy of the latest
Monitoring Report of the Regional
Office of the Ministry of
Environment and Forests as per
circular dated 30th May, 2012 on
the status of compliance of
conditions stipulated in all the
existing environmental clearances
including Amendments shall be
provided. In addition, status of
compliance of Consent to Operate
for the ongoing I existing operation
of the project from SPCB shall be
attached with the EIA-EMP report.
d. In case the existing project has not At the time of establishment, EC was not The unit was
obtained environmental clearance, applicable on pigment industries. established before
reasons for not taking EC under the 2006. The unit has
provisions of the EIA Notification obtained certified
1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 compliance report of
shall be provided. Copies of CTO from SPCB.
Consent to Establish/No Objection
Certificate and Consent to Operate

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. vii
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
(in case of units operating prior to
EIA Notification 2006, CTE and
CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained
from the SPCB shall be submitted.
Further, compliance report to the
conditions of consents from the
SPCB shall be submitted.
4. Site Details
i. Location of the project site covering The unit is located in GIDC- Panoli. Details of the project
village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and site are covered under
State, Justification for selecting the topic no. 1.3.1 from
site, whether other sites were
page no. 4 to 7 of
considered.
chapter 1.
Details regarding
selection of site is
covered in 5.1 on
page no. 154 of
chapter-5.
Land possession
document is attached
as Annexure-IV.
ii. A toposheet of the study area of --- A Topo sheet of the
radius of 10km and site location on study area of radius of
1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an 10 km and site location
A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco- on 1:50000 scale on an
sensitive areas and environmentally A3/A2 sheet is
sensitive places) uploaded.
iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for Since the proposed activity is considered Details regarding
selection of site to be taken up at existing location at selection of site is
GIDC Panoli with established technology covered in 5.1 on page
with minimum pollution, hence no no. 154 of chapter-5.
alternatives for site or process etc are
under consideration.
iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four Details of the project

corners of the site. Latitude Longitude site are covered under
21°32'29.60"N 73°0'3.20"E
topic no. 1.3.1 from
page no. 4 to 7 of
chapter 1.
v. Google map-Earth downloaded of Google map location is shown in Chapter Details of the project
the project site. 1 of EIA Report. site are covered
from page no. 4 to 7
of
chapter 1.
vi. Layout maps indicating existing unit --- Plant layout
as well as proposed unit indicating indicating storage
storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, plant area,

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. viii
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
area, utilities etc. If located within green belt area,
an Industrial area/Estate/Complex, utilities are attached
layout of Industrial Area indicating asAnnexure-III.
location of unit within the Industrial
area/Estate.
vii. Photographs of the proposed and A photograph of existing land is Photographs of site is
existing (if applicable) plant site. If incorporated in EIA Report. covered in figure 2.4
existing, show photographs of on page no 68.
plantation/greenbelt, in particular.
viii. Land use break-up of total land of --- Land use break up of
the project site (identified and total land is covered in
acquired), government/ private - topic no 3.7 on page
agricultural, forest, wasteland, water
no 102 in chapter 3.
bodies, settlements, etc. shall be
included. (not required for industrial
area)
ix. A list of major industries with name --- Details are covered
and type within study area (10km under topic no. 3.1,
radius) shall be incorporated. Land from page no. 76 to 77
use details of the study area of chapter-3.
x. Geological features and Geo- Noted Not applicable as
hydrological status of the study area project is located in
shall be included.
GIDC
Estate.
xi. Details of Drainage of the project up --- Not applicable.
to 5km radius of study area. If the
site is within 1 km radius of any
major river, peak and lean season
river discharge as well as flood
occurrence frequency based on
peak rainfall data of the past 30
years. Details of Flood Level of the
project site and maximum Flood
Level of the river shall also be
provided. (mega green field
projects)
xii. Status of acquisition of land. If Land possession is already completed & Land possession
acquisition is not complete, stage of documents are incorporated in EIA document from GIDC is
the acquisition process and report of the same. attached as Annexure-
expected time of complete
IV.
possession of the land.
xiii. R&R details in respect of land in Not Applicable. Unit will employ
line with state Government policy. local worker so this
condition is not
applicable.
5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):
i. Permission and approval for the use Not Applicable. Not Applicable
of forest land (forestry clearance), if
any, and recommendations of the
State Forest Department. (if
applicable)
ii. Land use map based on High Not Applicable. Not Applicable

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. ix
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of
the proposed site delineating the
forestland (in case of projects
involving forest land more than 40
ha)
iii. Status of Application submitted for Not Applicable. The project area is non- Not Applicable
obtaining the stage I forestry forest land.
clearance along with latest status
shall be submitted.
iv. The projects to be located within 10 There are no National parks, Not Applicable
km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,
Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory corridors of Wild Animals,
Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, within the 10 Km buffer zone.
the project proponent shall submit
the map duly authenticated by Chief
Wildlife Warden showing these
features vis-à-vis the project
location and the recommendations
or comments of the Chief Wildlife
Warden-thereon.
v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly Not Applicable Not Applicable
authenticated by the Chief Wildlife
Warden of the State Government
for conservation of Schedule I
fauna, if any exists in the study
area.
vi. Copy of application submitted for Not Applicable Not Applicable
clearance under the Wildlife
(Protection) Act, 1972, to the
Standing Committee of the National
Board for Wildlife.
6. Environmental Status
i. Determination of atmospheric The meteorological parameters play a Details are covered
inversion level at the project site vital role in transport and dispersion of under topic no. 3.2 in
and site-specific pollutants in the atmosphere. table no. 3.2 & figure
micrometeorological data using
no. 3.1 & 3.2 from
temperature, relative humidity,
hourly wind speed and direction and page no. 78 to 80 of
rainfall. chapter-3.
ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 AAQM locations were monitored on Details are covered
locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, 24 hourly average bases twice in a under topic no.
NOX, CO and other parameters week as per guidelines of CPCB and 3.3.1.2 in table no. 3.5
relevant to the project shall be NAAQS.. The locations for AAQM
and figure no. 3.3
collected. The monitoring stations study were selected within the 10 km
shall be based CPCB guidelines radius of the proposed plant from page no. 78 to 85
and take into account the pre- installation. Ambient air quality was of chapter-3.
dominant wind direction, population monitored on 8 locations to generate
zone and sensitive receptors representative ambient air quality
including reserved forests. data.
iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement Data of all AAQ measurement for 12 Details are covered
for 12 weeks of all stations as per weeks of all stations are incorporated in under topic no.
frequency given in the NAQQM EIA Report. 3.3.1.2 in table no. 3.5

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. x
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
Notification of Nov. 2009 along with and figure no. 3.3
- min., max., average and 98% from page no. 78 to 85
values for each of the AAQ of chapter-3. Raw
parameters from data of all AAQ
data are attached as
stations should be provided as an
annexure to the EIA Report. Annexure-XIII.
iv. Surface water quality of nearby Surface water samples were collected Details are covered
River (100m upstream and from locations during the study period under topic no. 3.4,
downstream of discharge point) and and analyzed for a number of physico- figure no 3.5, Table no
other surface drains at eight chemical parameters.
3.9 & 3.19 on page no
locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC
guidelines. 92 to 96.
v. Whether the site falls near to No Not applicable.
polluted stretch of river identified by
the CPCB/MoEF&CC, if yes give
details.
vi. Ground water monitoring at Ground water samples were collected Details are covered
minimum at 8 locations shall be from locations during the study period under topic no. 3.4
included. and analyzed for a number of physico- table no. 3.7 to 3.8
chemical parameters. and figure no. 3.4 from
page no. 86 to 91 of
chapter-3.
vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 A total of 8 locations were identified for Details are covered
locations within the study area. ambient noise monitoring in the study under topic no. 3.5
area. in table no. 3.11 and
figure no. 3.6 on page
no.
98 of chapter-3.
viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB The soil samples were examined for Details are covered
guidelines. various physic chemical parameters, under topic no. 3.6
to determine the existing soil in table no. 3.13 to
characteristics of the study area. The
3.14 and figure no.
soil samples were collected from
selected locations during monitoring 3.7
season. from page no. 100 to
102 of chapter-3.
ix. Traffic study of the area, type of Traffic counts are important to calculate Details are covered
vehicles, frequency of vehicles for the proposed load on the approach Road under topic no. 3.10
transportation of materials, of the Project. from page no. 121 to
additional traffic due to proposed Traffic counts were collected and
122 of chapter 3.
project, parking arrangement etc. recorded in 4 hous intervals.
Morning period (pick hours) suvery was
carried out from 8.00 to 12.00 hts.
Evening period (pick hours) survey was
carried out from 16.00 to 20.00 hrs.
x. Detailed description of flora and Most of the study area is under human Details are covered
fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) settlement and agricultural practice. The under topic no.3.8.3 &
existing in the study area shall be grasses were found growing on open 3.8.4 in table no. 3.16
given with special reference to rare, places, agricultural area and near human to 3.17 from page no.
endemic and endangered species. settlements.
105 to 110 of chapter-
If Schedule- I fauna are found within
the study area, a Wildlife 3.

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xi
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
Conservation Plan shall be
prepared and furnished.
xi. Socio-economic status of the study Detailed socio-economic data were Details are covered
area. collected within 10 km radius of the under topic no. 3.9
existing Project site. Preliminary from
information was collected during field page no. 110 to 114 of
investigation followed by secondary data chapter-3.
from the census of India 2011.
7. Impact and Environment Management Plan
i. Assessment of ground level The air quality impacts have been Details of ground level
concentration of pollutants from the predicted for the proposed Existing concentration of
stack emission based on site- plant assuming baseline air quality. pollutants from the
specific meteorological features. In Site-specific meteorological
stack emission are
case the project is located on a hilly parameters have been recorded by
terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be continuous monitoring. Short term 24 covered under topic
done using inputs of the specific hourly GLC's incremental values were no. 4.2.2 from page
terrain characteristics for estimated using the site-specific no. 130 to 141 of
determining the potential impacts of meteorological conditions. chapter-4.
the project on the AAQ. Cumulative Details of ground level
impact of all sources of emissions concentration of
(including \ transportation) on the pollutants from the
AAQ of the area shall be assessed. stack emission are
Details ofthe model used and the covered under topic no.
input data used for modeling shall 4.2.2 from page no.
also be provided. The air quality 130 to 141 of chapter-
contours shall be plotted on a 4.
location map showing the location
of project site, habitation nearby,
sensitive receptors, if any.
ii. Water Quality modeling - in case of Not applicable. Not Applicable. The
discharge in water body unit is discharging
effluent into M/s.NCTL.
iii. Impact of the transport of the raw Mostly all raw materials are available in Details of impact of
materials and end products on the local market, thus will be purchased from the transport of the
surrounding environment shall be local market. The convenient raw materials and end
assessed and provided. In this transportation medium will be used for
products are covered
regard, options for transport of raw the transportation of raw materials. Unit
materials and finished products and will take care about no any negative under topic no.
wastes (large quantities) by rail or impact should occur during 4.2.7.1.3 from page
rail-cum road transport or convey or transportation. no. 146 & topic no .
cum- rail transport shall be 4.2.7.2.4 on page no
examined. 147 of chapter-4.
iv. A note on treatment of wastewater Unit will be treated in in-house ETP, after Detail of water and
from different plant operations, treatment, it will be sent to M/s.NCTL- water balance
extent recycled and reused for FETP. diagram is covered
different purposes shall be included.
Complete scheme of effluent
treatment. Characteristics of from page no. 50 & 51
untreated and treated effluent to of chapter 2.
meet the prescribed standards of
discharge under E (P) Rules.
v. Details of stack emission and action Flue gas emission will occur through Details are covered
plan for control of emissions to Boiler, TFH & DG Set & for prevention of under topic no. 2.6.2,

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xii
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
meet standards. emission; unit will provide ESP + Water from page no. 59 of
scrubber to mitigate it. chapter-2.
vi. Measures for fugitive emission There will be chances of fugitive Details are covered
control emission due to raw material handling under topic no. 2.6.2.3
and transportation. Unit will take from page no. 62 of
precautions to minimize fugitive emission chapter-2.
as low as possible.
vii. Details of hazardous waste Generated hazardous waste: Use spent Details are covered
generation and their storage, Oil, Containers/Barrels /Drums, under topic no. 2.6.3
utilization and management. Copies Contaminated Cotton rags, Chemical from page no. 63 to
of MOU regarding utilization of solid Sludge from Waste water treatment etc.
65 of chapter-2.
and hazardous waste in cement
plant shall also be included. EMP Detail of Energy
shall include the concept of waste- conservation is
minimization, recycle/reuse/recover covered under topic
techniques, Energy conservation, no. 10.5.1 from page
and natural resource conservation. no. 241 of chapter-2.
viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be Unit will be sending fly ash to brick Fly ash is sent to brick
ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, manufacturing units. manufacture unit.
2009. A detailed plan of action shall
be provided.
ix. Action plan for the green belt --- Details are covered
development plan in 33 % area i.e. under 10.4.7 from
land with not less than 1,500 trees pageno. 237.
per ha. Giving details of species,
width of plantation, planning Plant layout is attached
schedule etc. shall be included. The as Annexure-III.
green belt shall be around the
project boundary and a scheme for
greening of the roads used for the
project shall also be incorporated.
x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting Adequate care has been taken while GPCB is not allowing
measures at plant site shall be making efficient planning for bore water within
submitted to harvest rainwater from percolation of rainwater into the GIDC estate. Roof top
the roof tops and storm water drains underground tank without directly
water collection
to recharge the ground water and draining it outside and conserving
also to use for the various activities maximum extent of rain water within system is developed.
at the project site to conserve fresh the facility.
water and reduce the water
requirement from other sources.
xi. Total capital cost and recurring Capital cost of EMP is INR 490 Lacs. This point is covered
cost/annum for environmental Recurring cost of EMP is INR 558 Lacs.
pollution control measures shall be in topic no 6.5.1 in
included. chapter 6 of page no
163.
xii. Action plan for post-project A well-equipped laboratory with Details are covered
environmental monitoring shall be consumable items will be provided for under topic no.6.4.4 in
submitted. monitoring of important environmental table no. 6.2 from
parameters. Alternatively, monitoring can
be outsourced from MoEF/NABL page no. 160 to 161
recognized laboratory. ofchapter-6.

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xiii
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural The main objective of risk assessment- On site and offsite
and Man-made) Preparedness and emergency plan is
Emergency Management Plan  A Disaster Management Plan is attached as Annexure-
including Risk Assessment and prepared to meet any grave IX.
damage control. Disaster emergency which can occur due to
management plan should be linked Natural Disasters such as Floods,
with District Disaster Management Earthquakes, or due to Man-Made
Plan. Disasters such as Acts of war and
Fires, Power failures etc
 An Action Plan has been drawn to fix
responsibility and actions to be taken
by various groups to meet and contain
the disaster within the shortest
possible time and with minimum loss to
men, material and property. It is the
responsibility of all the individuals in
their respective areas to ensure the
success of this plan. This plan shall be
circulated for benefit / training of all
individuals residing in the premises.
 To mobilize the available / trained
manpower and handle the emergency
from
 To ascertain urgently the likely area of
influence and take actions for
warnings, control of disaster with
minimum damage to men, material,
machines and evacuation of
employees / public, identify the
persons affected / dead, arrange first
aid / medical help to the victims.
 Inform relatives of the casualties;
provide authoritative information to
News Media & others; preserve
relevant records & equipments needed
as evidence in any subsequent inquiry.
 Appraise District Administration / Civil
authorities’ etc. In order to ensure
prompt relief for execution of
Emergency Response Plan.
8. Occupational health
i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure --- Details are covered
the occupational health & safety of under section no.:
all contract and casual workers 7.7.9 from page no.
222 to 223 of chapter
7.
ii. Details of exposure specific health The exposure specific health status for Details are covered
status evaluation of worker. If the the workers will be carried out. under section no.:
workers' health is being evaluated 7.7.10 from page no.
by pre designed format, chest x 223 to 224 of chapter
rays, Audiometry, Spirometry,
7.
Vision testing (Far & Near vision,

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xiv
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
colour vision and any other ocular
defect) ECG, during pre-placement
and periodical examinations give
the details of the same. Details
regarding last month analyzed data
of above mentioned parameters as
per age, sex, duration of exposure
and department wise.
iii. Details of existing Occupational & It is proposed to formulate and Details are covered
Safety Hazards. What are the implement an EMP for Occupational under section no.:
exposure levels of hazards and Safety and Health with following aim… 7.7.11 on page no 224
whether they are within Permissible of chapter 7.
Exposure level (PEL). If these are • To keep air-borne concentration of toxic
not within PEL, what measures the (if available) and hazardous chemicals
company has adopted to keep them below PE Land TLV.
within PEL so that health of the • Protect general health of workers likely
workers can be preserved, to be exposed to such chemicals
• Training, guidelines, resources and
facilities to concerned department for
occupational health hazards.
• Permanent changes to workplace
procedures or work location to be done
if it is found necessary on the basis of
findings from workplace Monitoring
Plan.
iv. Annual report of health status of - Details are covered
workers with special reference to under section no.:
Occupational Health and Safety. 7.7.12 on page no 225
of chapter 7.
9. Corporate Environment Policy
i. Does the company have a well laid Yes Details are covered
down Environment Policy approved under section no.: 6.1
by its Board of Directors? If so, it on page no. 156 of
may be detailed in the EIA report. chapter 6.
The copy of Quality
& Environment, Health
and Safety Policy is
attached as Annexure-
VIII.
ii. Does the Environment Policy Yes Details are covered
prescribe for standard operating under section no.: 6.1
process / procedures to bring into on page no. 156 of
focus any infringement / deviation / chapter 6.
violation of the environmental or
forest norms / conditions? If so, it
may be detailed in the EIA.
iii. What is the hierarchical system or For performing all the environmental Details are covered
Administrative order of the company management activities and operating under section no.: 6.1
to deal with the environmental environmental management systems on page no. 156 of
issues and for ensuring compliance efficiently, unit has established chapter 6.
with the environmental clearance Environmental Management Cell
conditions? Details of this system governed by director.

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xv
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
may be given.
iv. Does the company have system of Yes Details of reporting of
reporting of non-compliances / non-compliances are
violations of environmental norms to covered under section
the Board of Directors of the
no.: 6.1 from page
company and / or shareholders or
stakeholders at large? This no. 156 to 157 of
reporting mechanism shall be chapter 6.
detailed in the EIA report
10. Details regarding infrastructure Rest room for labor & Truck Drivers are Unit will provide basic
facilities such as sanitation, fuel, already provided. infrastructure to the
restroom etc. to be provided to the labor force during
labor force during construction as construction as well as
well as to the casual workers to the casual workers
including truck drivers during including truck drivers
operation phase. during operation phase.
11. Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)
i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of Socio-economic development activities This is an expansion
the project cost) shall be earmarked will be done based on the suggestions
project.
towards the Enterprise Social for general necessity in villages and
Details are covered
Commitment based on Public budgetary amount.
under topic no. 8.2 on
Hearing issues and item-wise
page no 227.
details along with time bound action
plan shall be included. Socio-
economic development activities
need to be elaborated upon.
12. Any litigation pending against the No litigation pending from the court case No litigation pending
project and/or any direction/order against the unit.
passed by any Court of Law
Against the project, if so, details
thereof shall also be included. Has
the unit received any notice under
the Section 5 of Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant
Sections of Air and Water Acts? If
so, details thereof and
compliance/ATR to the notice(s)
and present status of the case.
13. 'A tabular chart with index for point Complied Complied
wise compliance of above TOR.
SPECIFIC TERMS OF REFERENCE
1. Details on solvents to be used, In manufacturing process solvents such Details are covered
measures for solvent recovery as ONT, MCB, Xylene will be used and under topic no. 10.5.6
and for emissions control. by distillation recovered solvent will be from page no. 244 to
recovered to use in next batch of
247 of chapter-10.
process.
2. Details of process emissions from --- This details are
the proposed unit and its covered in topic no
arrangement to control. 2.6.2.2 on page no 61.
3. Ambient air quality data should AAQM locations were monitored on 24 Detailed are covered
include VOC, other process- hourly average bases twice in a week as under topic no. 3.3

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xvi
total 2425 MT/Month

No. Status
specific pollutants* like NH3*, per guidelines of CPCB and NAAQS.. from page no. 81 to 86
The locations for AAQM study were of chapter-3.
chlorine*, HCl*, HBr*, H2S*, HF*,
selected within the 10 km radius of the
CS2 etc., (*-as applicable) proposed plant installation.
4. Work zone monitoring -- Detailed are covered
arrangements for hazardous under topic no. 7.7.6
Chemicals. on page no. 219 of
chapter-7.
5. Detailed effluent treatment scheme -- The unit is not a ZLD
including segregation for units unit.
adopting 'Zero' liquid discharge.
6. Action plan for odor control to be Unit will develop greenbelt around the Detailed are covered
submitted. plant, which will prevent any odor is there. under topic no. 2.8 on
There is no such process in which specific page no 72.
odor control measures require.
7. A copy of the Memorandum of -- Unit will send fly ash to
Understanding signed with cement brick manufacturer.
manufacturers indicating clearly
that they co- process organic
solid/hazardous waste generated.
8. Authorization/Membership for the Unit has obtained Fresh water supply -- The unit is a member of
disposal of liquid effluent in CETP M/s. NCTL.
and solid/hazardous waste in
TSDF, if any.
9. Action plan for utilization of --- Unit has installed MEE
MEE/dryers salts. to make ammonium
sulfate (product).
10. Material Safety Data Sheet for all Noted Material Safety Data
the Chemicals are being used/will Sheet are provided in
soft copy.
be used.
11. Authorization/Membership for the Unit has obtained membership. Membership
disposal of solid/ hazardous waste certificate is
in TSDF. attached as
Annexures-VI.
12. Details of incinerator if to be Nil No incineration
installed. installed.
13 Risk assessment for storage and Failure or ineffectiveness of the controls Detailed of risk
handling of hazardous can lead to hazardous situation in any assessment are
industry handling potentially hazardous covered under topic
chemicals/solvents. Action plan materials. Following factors govern the
for handling & safety system to no. 7.3 to 7.4 on page
severity of consequence of the loss of
containment. no. 171 to 199 of
be incorporated.
chapter-7.
14 Arrangements for ensuring health All the necessary personal protective Detailed are
and safety of workers engaged in equipment’s are provided for the covered under topic
respective works. The unit has provided no. 7.7.8 on page
handling of toxic materials. such arrangements to minimize manual
no. 222 of chapter-
handling of chemicals and hazardous
wastes. 7.

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. xvii
1CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Table of Contents
CHAPTER -1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose Of The Report 1

1.1.1 Introduction Of The Project & Project Proponent 1
1.1.1.1 Identification Of The Project 1
1.2 Identification Of The Project And Project Proponent 3
1.2.1 Project Proponent 3
1.3 Brief Description Of Nature, Size And Location Of The Project 4
1.3.1 Brief Description Of Nature, Size And Location Of The Project 4
1.3.2 Location Map 6
1.3.3 Location Of The Project 7
1.4 Regulatory Frame Work 7
1.5 Scope Of Eia Study 8
1.5.1 Size And Cost Of The Project 8
1.6 Regulatory Frame Work 8
1.7 Scope And Objective Of Eia Study 9
1.8 Structure Of Eia Report 10
1.9 Regulatory Provisions And Requirement 12
1.9.1 General Legal Requirements 12
Table of Tables
1.1 List Of Products 2

1.2 Details Of Partners 4
1.3 Brief Description Of Nature, Size And Location Of Project 5
1.4 Near By Industry Details 5
1.5 Capital Cost Of Projection 8
1.6 Structure Of EIA Report 10
1.7 Applicable Regulatory Provision For Proposed Project 12
Table of Figures
1.1 Project Location Map 6

1.2 Arial View Of Project Site 7
Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat for the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals
with total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER – 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

As per the EIA Notification dated 14th Sept.2006, as amended from time to time; it is mandatory to
have Environmental Clearance for any new industry or the expansion/modernization of the existing
industry from Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change, Government of India, New Delhi.
For this, Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) is to be conducted as per guidelines given by New
Delhi.
The purpose of the EIA report is to provide a coherent statement of the potential impacts of the
proposed project and the measures that should be taken to eliminate, reduce and remedy them. It
contains essential information for:
 The proponent to implement the proposal in an environmentally and socially responsible way;
 The responsible authority to make an informed decision on the proposal, including the terms
and conditions that must be attached to an approval or authorization; and
 The public to understand the proposal and its likely impacts on people and the environment.
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION OF THE PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT
1.1.1.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT
(A) PROJECT PROPOSAL
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV,
Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat. Unit has proposed to manufacture Synthetic Organic
Chemicals. Unit is applying EC for manufacturing of 2425 MT/Month of Organic Chemicals & 3560
MT/Month of Inorganic products. The unit was established before 2006.
Consent copies before 2008 & production data since inception of the unit are attached as
ANNEXURE-I. TOR copy is attached as ANNEXURE-II. The details of product are given in table
no.1.1. The product proposed by the unit falls in the Schedule attached to the EIA Notification, i.e.
Project No. 5(f).
The purpose of this report is to:
 Establish a pre-project baseline with respect to environmental indicators.
 Identify environment related impacts.
 Evaluate safety related risk factors associated with project.
 Propose appropriate mitigation measures for minimizing the adverse impacts to the extent
possible.
 Suggest Environment Management Plan.
 Recommend Risk Management Plan.

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited M/S GREEN CIRCLE INC. 1
This report is also made in the overall frame work of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
Notification dated 14thSeptember-2006 (and subsequent amendments to the same) issued by the
Ministry of Environment and Forests and Climate Change (MoEF & CC), by providing required
information with regards to the project as mentioned in the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF &
CC.
TABLE: 1.1
LIST OF PRODUCTS
Sr. Name of CAS Existing as Proposed Total End Use
No. Products No./CI per Consent (Increased MT/
No. (AWH-96796) /Decreased) MONTH
MT/MONTH MT/MONTH
ORGANIC PRODUCTS
Captive Power ---
1. 2.1 MW - 2.1 MW 0 Discontinued.
Plant (2 SETS)
For the
manufacturing of
Copper
CPC Alpha Blue,
2. Pthalocyanine 74160 125 +1375 1500
CPC Beta blue, Ink,
Blue
Printing Ink and
Packaging Industry.
Pigment Alpha
3. 74160 25 +100 125
Blue Plastic, Ink ,
Pigment Beta Rubber & Textile
4. 74160 25 +575 600
Blue
Ink, Coatings,
Plastics & Paints,
Pigment Green -
5. 74260 0 +100 100 Cosmetic, Printing
7
ink and Packaging
Industry.
6. Printing inks,
Azo Pigments --- 0 +100 100 plastics, paints,
Total 175 2250 2425
INORGANIC PRODUCTS
7758- Nutrient for
1. Copper Sulphate 33.33 +41.67 75
99-8 agriculture crop
Ammonium 7783- Soil softening
2. 250 +1250 1500
Sulphate 20-2 agent/ fertilizer
7440-
3. Copper Earth 250 +160 410 Soil softening agent
50-8
Sodium
7681- Used as a
4. Hypochlorite 00 +33 33
52-9 disinfectant
solution
Internally reused
7647-
5. Hydrochloric acid 00 +57 57 within the CPC
01-0
Green-7 or sell.
Aluminum
21645-
hydroxide 00 +105 105 Pharma Industry.
6. 51-2
AND/OR
Poly Aluminium 1327- 00 +1380 +1380 Use as a flocculent

Chloride 41-9
Total 533.33 3026.67 3560
(B) SCREENING CATEGORY
As per EIA Notification dated 14thSeptember, 2006, as amended from time to time; this project falls
under Category “B1”, Project or Activity-5 (f) and requires Environmental Clearance from SEAC,
Gandhinagar. However, the Panoli region is declared as critically polluted area, we have applied
for EC application by considering Category “A” project at MoEF & CC, Delhi.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV,
Panoli, District: Bharuch, Gujarat. Unit is applying EC for manufacturing of 2425 MT/Month of
Organic Chemicals & 3560 MT/Month of Inorganic products. Total plot area of the unit is 99002
Sq.mt. & 31096 (32%) sq.mt will be Utilized for green belt area within the premises. Total 8504
Sq.mt area will be developed by the unit (8%) outside the premises. Plant Layout of the unit is
attached as ANNEXURE-III.
1.2.1 PROJECT PROPONENT
1. Mr. Jayanti Meghjibhai Patel, aged 66 years, is the Executive Chairman of our Company. Mr.
Jayanti M. Patel holds a Bachelors of Chemical Engineering degree from Maharaja Sayajirao
University, Baroda. He currently oversees the international marketing of the Company and is
responsible for all major policy decisions. Mr. Jayanti M. Patel has more than 37 years of
experience in the dyes and Pigments industry and more than 20 years of experience in the
Agrochemicals industry
2. Mr. Ashish Natwarlal Soparkar aged 66 years, is the Managing Director of our Company. Mr
Ashish N. Soparkar holds a Bachelors of Chemical Engineering degree from Maharaja Sayajirao
University of Baroda. He currently oversees the corporate affairs and finance matters of our
Company.Mr Ashish N Soparkar, has more than 37 years of experience in the dyes and Pigments
industry, and more than 20 years of experience in the Agrochemicals industry.
3. Mr. Natwarlal Meghjibhai Patel, aged 65 years, is the Managing Director of the Company. Mr.
Natwarlal Patel holds a Master’s of Science degree from Sardar Patel University, Gujarat. He
currently oversees the technical matters of the Agrochemicals divisions, as well as the international
and domestic marketing of our Agrochemical products.Mr. Natwarlal Patel, has more than 35 years
of experience in the dyes and Pigments industry, and more than 20 years of experience in the
Agrochemicals industry.

4. Mr. Ramesh Meghjibhai Patel, aged 62 years, is the Executive Director of the Company. Mr.
Ramesh Patel holds a Bachelors of Arts degree from Saurashtra University. Mr. Ramesh Patel has
31 years of experience in the Pigments Industry and 20 years of experience in the Agrochemicals
Industry. Mr. Ramesh Patel is currently in charge of overseeing purchases made by our Company
(including domestic purchases and global imports) and is responsible for all liaisons between our
Company and government authorities or other regulatory bodies
5. Mr. Anand Ishwarbhai Patel, aged 56 years, is the Executive Director of the Company. Mr.
Anand Patel holds a Bachelor of Science degree from the Gujarat University. Mr. Anand Patel has
28 years’ experience in the Pigments Industry. Mr. Anand Patel currently oversees the
manufacturing of Pigments at Vatva, and Panoli as well as the International & Domestic marketing
of Pigments.
The list of Project proponent is listed in below table no. 1.2.
TABLE: 1.2
LIST OF DIRECTOR
Sr. No. Name and address of the Directors Designation
1. Mr. Jayantibhai M. Patel Executive Chairman
359, Lane No. 18, SatyagrahChhavani, Satelite Road,
Ahmedaba
2. Mr. Ashish bhai N. Soparkar Managing Director
246, Lane 13,Satyagrah Chhavani, Satelite Road,
Ahmedabad
3. Mr. Natubhai M. Patel Managing Director
6-B, Ashok Vatika No. 1, Opp. Ekta Farm, Ambli, Bopal
Road, Bodakdev, Ahmedabad
4. Mr. Ramesh bhai M. Patel Executive Director
54, Shreenath Park ,B/h ManekBaug Society, Ambawadi,
Ahmedabad
5. Mr.Anandbhai I. Patel Executive Director
53, Shreenath Park ,B/h ManekBaug Society, Ambawadi
Ahmedabad
1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE AND LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

1.3.1 Brief Description of Nature, Size and Location of the Project
Brief description of project in terms of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to the
country, region is given in the table no 1.3. And list of nearby Industries is given below in table no.
1.4.

TABLE: 1.3
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE AND LOCATION OF PROJECT.
Particulars Details Distance from Site
Villages Sanjali 1.08 KM
Latitude: 21°32'29.60"N
Approx. Geographical positioning
Longitude: 73°0'3.20"E
Nearest City Ankleshwar 10 Km N
Ankleshwar 8 Km N
Nearest Railway line/ Railway station
Domestic Airport Surat 55 Km S

International Airport Ahmedabad 210 Km N
TABLE: 1.4
NEARBY INDUSTRY DETAILS
SR. NO. NAME OF NEARBY INDUSTRIES
1. M/s. PI Industries Ltd.
2. M/s. Luna Chemical Industries Pvt Ltd (UNIT-I)
3. M/s. Solvay Specialities India Private Limited
4. M/s. Gharda Chemicals Ltd

1.3.2 LOCATIONMAP
FIGURE: 1.1
ARIAL VIEW OF THE PROJECT (10 Km)

FIGURE: 1.2
PROJECT SITE
1.3.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at plot no:- 20,21,21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli,
District: Bharuch, Gujarat, which is one of the fastest growing industrial estate and having all the
essential facilities & infrastructure for the management & disposal of effluent discharge. The
approximate geographical positioning of the project site is at Latitude: 21°32'29.60"N, Longitude:
73°0'3.20"E .The location of the project site can be identified from the location map shown in
Figure-1.1.
1.4 REGULATORY FRAME WORK
To keep the environment congenial for better standard of living, the provisions have been made in
the constitution of India and many Enactments have taken place, so that, Industrialization may
not have adverse impact on the environment. There are many Acts/ Rules/Notifications issued by
MoEF & CC in this regard, few of them are mentioned below:
 Environment (Protection) Act,1986;
 Environment (Protection) Rules,1986;
 Water (Prevention &Control of Pollution) Act,1974;

 Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act,1981;
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification, dated 14thSeptember-2006 as amended
from time to time.
1.5 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY
The Disciplines covered under the study are pre-requisite in formation of the proposed site,
process technology, effluent generation, treatment and its proper disposal, hazardous waste
management, impacts and management plans. This report contains data of ambient air quality
monitoring as well as the ecological studies noise environment, socio-economic study carried out
during March-2018 to May-2018.
1.5.1 SIZE AND COST OF THE PROJECT
The expected cost of proposed expansion of the project is Rs. 3570 Lakhs. New Plant and
machinery installations will also have to be acquired and installed. Environment Protection and
safety systems have also been considered in planning the Cost Projection. The below given table
no-1.5 shows the break-up of the project cost.
TABLE: 1.5
CAPITAL COST PROJECTION
Sr. No. Purpose Proposed
(Rs. In Lakhs)
Factory building and other civil
1) 200
construction
2) Plant and machinery 2880
3) Environment Protection & Safety 490
a) Effluent Treatment Plant 280
b) Safety & Safety Cost 50
c) Green Belt 10
d) Air Pollution Control Measures 100
e) Solid Waste Management Cost 50
TOTAL 3570
1.6 REGULATORYFRAMEWORK
As per the EIA Notification, September 2006, the proposed project falls under category 5(f) of the
schedule. The unit has proposed to manufacture organic chemicals which requires prior
Environmental Clearance (EC).They are categorized as "CATEGORY-B1", requiring EC from
STATE LEVEL EXPERT COMMITTEE (SEIAA & SEAC). However, the Panoli region is declared
as critically polluted area, we have applied for EC application by considering Category “A” project

at MoEF & CC, Delhi. We have already obtained TOR. Now based on the TOR, we are applying
for EC application.
1.7 SCOPE & OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDY
This EIA Report is prepared to comply with the requirements of the MoEF & CC as per the
guideline for the Clearance. The objectives of this EIA are:
 To describe the Project and associated works together with the requirements for carrying out
the Project.
 To identify and describe the elements of the community and environment likely to be affected
by the Project, and / or likely to cause impacts upon the Project, including both the natural and
man-made environment.
 To identify and quantify emission sources and determine the severity of impacts on sensitive
receivers and potential affected uses.
 To recognize and quantify any environmental impacts associated with the Project and
recommend appropriate mitigation measures.
 To study existing landscape and visual quality in the study area so as to evaluate the
landscape and visual impacts of the project.
 To propose mitigation measures to minimise pollution, environmental disturbance and
nuisance during construction and operation of the project;
 To identify, predict and evaluate the residual (that is, after practicable mitigation) environmental
impacts and cumulative effects expected to arise during the construction and operation phases
of the project in relation to the sensitive receivers and potential affected uses.
 To identify, assess and specify methods, measures and standards, to be included in the
detailed design, construction and operation of the project which are necessary to mitigate these
impacts and reduce them to allowable levels within established standards / guidelines.
 To investigate the extent of side-effects of proposed mitigation measures that may lead to other
forms of impacts.
 To identify constraints associated with the mitigation measures recommended in this EIA.
 To identify any additional studies necessary to fulfil the objectives to the requirements of this
EIA Study.

1.8 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT
The generic structure of the EIA report, as per the guideline provided by MoEF & CC is illustrated
in the following tabulated format table no:-1.6.
TABLE: 1.6
STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT
Sr. EIA Structure Contents
No.
1. Introduction  Purpose of the report and regulatory frame work
 Identification of the project and project proponent
 Key Information of project
 Regulatory Frame work
 Scope & Objective of EIA study
 Structure of EIA report
 Terms of reference & Its Compliance
2. Project Description  Condensed description of those aspects of the project
(based on project feasibility study), likely to cause
environmental effects. Description contains the details of
the following:
 Type of project
 Need for the project
 Location details showing general location, specific
location, project boundary & project site layout)
 Technology and process description
 Project description. Including drawings showing project
layout, components of project etc. Schematic
representations of the feasibility drawings which give
information important for EIA purpose
 Description of mitigation measures incorporated into
the project to meet environmental standards,
3. Description of the  Study area, period, components & methodology
Environment  Establishment of baseline for valued environmental
components, as identified in the scope
 Base maps of all environmental components
4. Anticipated  Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to
Environmental Impacts & project location, possible accidents, project design,

No.
Mitigation Measures project construction, regular operations, final
decommissioning or rehabilitation of a completed project
 Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse
impacts identified
 Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of
environmental components
 Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for
determining significance, Assigning significance)
 Mitigation measures
5. Analysis of alternatives  Need for alternatives with respect to technology and
(technology & site) site selection, give details of each alternative,
summary of adverse impact of each alternative and
propose mitigation measures for each alternative.
6. Environmental  Technical aspects of environmental monitoring for the

Monitoring Program effectiveness of mitigation measures (incl. Measurement
methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis,
reporting schedules, emergency procedures, budget &
procurement schedules)
7. Additional Study: Risk  Hazard Identification
Assessment & Disaster  Risk Assessment & control/prevention Measures
Management Plan  Disaster Management
8. Project Benefits  Detail of the Socioeconomic & other tangible benefits
of the project
9. Environmental Cost  Environmental cost benefit analysis to be carried out
Benefit Analysis if required.
10. Environment  Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring
Management Plan that mitigation measures are implemented and their
effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA. The
Chapter consist of:
 Mitigation measures for impacts
 Pollution Prevention Plan
 Greenbelt Development Plan

No.
 Mangrove Management Plan
 Dredging management Plan
 Waste management plan
 Environment Management Cell
 Budgetary Provisions for EMS
11. Summary & Conclusion  Description of brief of EIA report
12. Disclosure of Consultant  Detail of the EIA Consultant
Engaged
1.9 REGULATORY PROVISIONS AND REQUIREMENT
The proposed project is for the manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Chemicals & Inorganic
Chemicals is covered under EIA Notification of MoEF & CC. It is obligatory for the proponent to
obtain prior EC from MINISTRY OF ENVIRONMENT AND FORESTS & CLIMATE CHANGE
(MoEF & CC ), Delhi and Consent to Establish (CTE/NOC) and Consent to Operate (CTO/CCA)
from GPCB for the proposed project, under the various Environmental laws.
1.9.1 GENERAL LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
The general legal statutory requirements applicable to the proposed project are tabulated in Table
1.7.
TABLE: 1.7
APPLICABLE REGULATORY PROVISION FOR PROPOSED PROJECT
Sr. Legal Instrument Concern Authority or Bodies
No.
1. Air (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
Pollution) Act, 1981 amended 1987
2. Air (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
Pollution) (Union Territories) Rules,
1983
3. Water (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
Pollution) Act, 1974 amended 1988
4. Water (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
Pollution) Rules, 1975
5. The Environment (Protection) Act, Ministry of Environment, Forests& Climate
1986, amended 1991 Change, CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
6. Environmental (Protection) Rules, Ministry of Environment, Forests& Climate

1986 (Amendments in 1999, 2001, Change, CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC
2002, 2002, 2002, 2003, 2004)
7. Hazardous & Other Wastes MoEF&CC, CPCB, SPCB/UTPCC, DGFT, Port
(Management and Transboundary Authority and Customs Authority
Movement) Rules 2016
8. Manufacture Storage and Import of Ministry of Environment & Forests, Chief
Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 Controller of Imports and Exports, CPCB,
amended 2000 SPCB/UTPCC, Chief Inspector of Factories,
Chief Inspector of Dock Safety, Chief Inspector of
Mines, AERB, Chief Controller of Explosives,
District Collector or District Emergency Authority,
CEES under DRDO
9. Chemical Accidents (Emergency CCG, SCG, DCG, LCG and MAH Units
Planning, Preparedness and
Response) Rules, 1996
10. Ozone Depleting Substances Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate
(Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 Change
11. EIA Notification, 2006 as amended MoEF&CC, SPCB/UTPCC
timely (2009, 2011)
12. Batteries (Management and SPCB/UTPCC, CPCB and MoEF
Handling) Rules, 2001.
13. Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate
amended 1992 Change, District Collector
14. Public Liability Insurance Rules, Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate
1991 amended 1993 Change, District Collector
15. Factories Act, 1948 Ministry of Labour, DGFASLI and Directorate of
Industrial Safety and Health/Factories
Inspectorate
16. The Gas Cylinder Rules, 2004 * Ministry of Commerce and Industry and Chief
Controller of Explosives, port conservator,
customs collector, DGCA, DC, DM, Police (sub
inspector to commissioner)
17. The Motor Vehicle Act, 1988 Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport and
Highways
18. The Central Motor Vehicle Rules, Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport and

1989 Highways
19. The Custom Act, 1962 CBEC, Ministry of Finance
(Note: * the rules are not directly applicable to the proposed project but during operation it may be
applicable timely depending up on allied operations like welding, fabrication & shipping of raw
materials & products.)

CHAPTER 2
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Table of Contents
CHAPTER – 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Type Of Project 15
2.2 Justification For Selecting Product 15
2.2.1 Justification Of Size Of The Project 15
2.3 Products And Raw Material Details 16
2.3.1 Details Of Product 16
2.3.2 Details Of Raw Material 16
2.3.2.1 Raw Material Storage & Handling 18
2.3.3 Transportation Of Raw Materials And Finished 18
Products
2.4 Process Description 20
2.4.1 Manufacturing Process 20
2.5 Resource Requirement 49
2.5.1 Land 49
2.5.2 Water 50
2.5.3 Energy Requirement 51
2.5.3.1 Details Of Energy Distribution/Utilization 52
2.5.4 Utilities 53
2.5.5 Equipments/ Machineries 54
2.5.6 Manpower 55
2.6 Pollution Potential Scenario 55
2.6.1 Effluent And Sewage Generation 55
2.6.1.1 Details Of Effluent Treatment Plant 56
2.6.1.2 Economical And Technical Viability Of The Effluent 59
Treatment System
2.6.2 Gaseous Emissions & Control 59
2.6.2.1 Flue Gas Emissions 59
2.6.2.2 Process Emissions 61
2.6.2.3 Fugitive Emission 62
2.6.3 Solid & Hazardous Waste Generation 63
2.6.3.1 Hazardous Waste And Solid Waste Management 65
2.6.3.2 Methodology For Decontamination 66
2.7 Importance And Justification Of Project 71
2.7.1 Project Implementation Schedule 72
2.10 Odor Management Plant 72
2.11 Fugitive Emissions Management Plan 73
2.12 Details Of Non Hazardous Waste 74
Table of Tables
2.1 List Of Raw Materials Consumption 16

2.2 Details Of Solvents Stored For Project 18
2.3 Details Of Raw Material And Finished Products 18
2.4 Details Of Raw Material Source And Method OfTransportation 19
2.5 List Of Etp Chemicals 20
2.7 Category-Wise Water Requirement 50
2.8 Fuel Consumption Requirement 52
2.9 Energy Distribution After Expansion 52
2.10 Details Of Utilities 53
2.11 Details Of Equipment/Machineries 54
2.12 Man Power Requirement 55
2.13 Category-Wise Wastewater Generation 55
2.15 Equipment List Of Proposed Effluent Treatment Plant 57
With Dimension
2.16 Waste Water Characteristics Of Different Streams 58
2.18 Details Of Cost Of ETP Per Year 59
2.19 Flue Gas Emissions 60
2.20 Process Emissions And Control Measures 61
2.21 Details Of Fugitive Emission Control Measures 62
2.22 Details Of Hazardous Waste 64
2.24 Project Implementation Schedule 71
2.25 Proposed Fugitive Emission Control Measures 73
2.31 Details Of Non Hazardous Waste 74
Table of Figures
2.1 Flow Diagram of ETP 58

2.2 Methodology of Decontamination 67
2.3 Photographs of existing site 68
2.4 Bar Chart 72
total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER-2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at Plot No. 20, 21, 21/1, Panoli GIDC, Industrial Estate, Dist.
Bharuch Gujarat. This is an existing facility. Now, the unit has proposed for the expansion. The existing
production capacity of organic products is 175 MT/Month. Now, the unit has proposed it from 175
MT/Month to 2425 MT/Month of Organic Chemicals & 3560 MT/Month of Inorganic products. As per the
EIA Notification, 14thSeptember 2006, the project falls under Category “B”, Project or Activity-5 (f) of the
schedule. However Panoli is declared as critically polluted area, the project becomes category-A project.
As per the official memorandum we are applying Category – A project to MoEF & CC, Delhi.
2.2 JUSTIFICATION FOR SELECTING PRODUCT
Proponent is already engaged in the manufacturing of the same product Synthetic Organic Chemicals.
 The promoters are already engaged in manufacturing and marketing of Pigments. Pigments are
used in plastic, paint, Ink, Textile industries. There is regular use of these products and has
demand in local market as well as in export. This will meet the local demand and generate
employment.
 The global pigments market size was valued at $20,023 million in 2015, and is expected to
garner $26,598 million by 2022, registering a CAGR of 4.1% during the forecast period 2022.
Pigments are solid materials that improve the appearance or impart color to the substrate on
which they are used.
 Unit is having good foreign demand of Pigments.
 Proponent is having best available technology to make products
2.2.1 JUSTIFICATION OF SIZE OF THE PROJECT
 Unit will dedicate individual floor for different- different activity.
 Ground floor will be used for the storage of raw materials and finished good product.
 Unit will install Drowning Vessel, SFD on ground floor and Distillation machineries on second
floor.
 Reactor and Filter Press is/will install on 1st & 2nd Floor.
 Unit will install equipment’s as per the attached equipment list.
 There is adequate space for the storage of raw materials & Utility area.

total 2425 MT/Month
2.3 PRODUCTS AND RAW MATERIAL DETAILS

2.3.1 DETAILS OF PRODUCT
Total production capacity of the unit will be the existing production capacity of organic products is 175
MT/Month. Now, the unit has proposed it from 175 MT/Month to 2425 MT/Month of Organic Chemicals &
3560 MT/Month of Inorganic products. The unit has proposed to manufacture Synthetic Organic
Chemicals at this premise. List of product is given in Chapter-1, Table No:-1.1.
2.3.2 DETAILS OF RAW MATERIAL
The list of name of raw materials for each product is provided in table no. 2.1, details of solvent used is
given in table no. 2.2.
TABLE: 2.1
LIST OF RAW MATERIALS CONSUMPTION
Sr. Name of the Name of the Raw Materials CAS no. / CI no. MT/ Quantity
no. Products of raw materials. MT MT/
Month
1 CPC Blue Catalyst ---- 0.002 3

Dichloro Toluene/ Ortho nitro 106-46-7 /88-72-2
toluene 0.1 150
Phthalic Anhydride 85-44-9 1.07 1605
Ammonium Carbonate 50 % 10361-29-2 1.38 2070
Cuprous Chloride 7758-89-6 0.19 285
Urea 57-13-6 1.20 1800
Amm. Molybdate 13106-76-8 0.004 6
Sulfuric acid from Alpha blue 7664-93-9 1.8
(25%) 2700
Fresh Sulfuric acid 7664-93-9 0.25 375
Total 5.896 8844
2 ALPHA BLUE CPC Crude 147-14-8 1 125
72 % sulfuric acid 7664-93-9 7.05 881.25
Caustic Soda 1310-73-2 0.045 5.625
Oleic Acid 112-80-1 0.021 2.625
Additive --- 0.08 10
Total 8.196 1024.5
3 BETA BLUE CPC Crude 147-14-8 1.03 618
78-93-3/ 1330-20-
0.06
MEK/Xylene/IBA 7/ 78-83-1 36
Caustic Flakes 1310-73-2 0.03 18
Rosin 8050-09-7 0.09 54
Hydrochloric acid 7647-01-0 0.08 48
Total 1.29 774
4 PIGMENT Aluminum Chloride 7446-70-0 1.94 194
GREEN - 7 Sodium Chloride 7440-23-5 0.42 42
C.P.C 147-14-8 0.56 56
Cupric chloride 7447-39-4 0.08 8
Chlorine gas 7782-50-5 1.28 128
Caustic 1310-73-2 0.07 7
total 2425 MT/Month
Hydrochloric acid 7647-01-0 0.57 57

Mono chloro benzene 108-90-7 0.04 4
Oleic Acid 112-80-1 0.02 2
Additive --- 0.03 3
Total 5.01 501
AZO PIGMENTS (REPRESENTATIVE PRODUCTS)
5 AZO HCl (35% concentration) 7647-01-0 1.5 150
PIGMENTS Sodium Nitrite 7632-00-0 0.250 25
Base (Amine)* --- 0.5 50
Caustic Lye 1310-73-2 0.6 60
Couple* --- 0.5 50
Total 3.35 335
LIST OF AMINES WITH CAS NOS.

Sr. No. Amines CAS No.
1. 2,5-dichloro aniline 95-82-9
2. 4-B acid 88-44-8
3. 2,4,5-Trichloroaniline 636-30-6
4. P-Amino benzamide 2835-68-9
5. 3-amino-4-methoxybenzanilide 120-35-4
6. 3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine 91-94-1
7. 4,5-Dichloro-2-aminobenzene sulphonic acid 88-50-6
8. 4-Chloro-5-methyl-2-aminobenzene sulphonic acid 88-51-7
9. Amino Guanidine bicarbonate 2582-30-1
10. o-Aminobenzotrifluoride 88-17-5
11. Dimethyl-2-aminoterphthalate 10312-55-7
12. 1,2-bis-o-amino phenoxyethane 85233-19-8
13. P-Aminobenzoylaminobenzamide 74441-06-8
14. o-Anisidine 90-04-0
15. 5-Amino-6-methyl benzimidazolone 67014-36-2
16. 4-chloro-2-nitro aniline 89-63-4
17. 8-aminoquinaldine 18978-78-4
18. Tetrachlorocyano benzoic acid methyl ester 71839-12-8
19. Fast Red ITR base 97-35-8
20. Fast Red B base 97-52-9
21. Fast Red RL base 16047-24-8
22. Bourdex GP base 96-96-8
23. 3,3'-dimethoxy benzidene 119-90-4
LIST OF COUPLERS WITH CAS NO
Sr. No. Couplers CAS No.

1 Naphthol-AS 92-77-3
2 Beta-Naphthol 135-19-3
3 Naphthol-AS D 135-61-5
4 Naphthol AS-Ph 92-74-0
5 Naphthol AS-LC 4273-92-1
6 Acetoacetoacetanilide 102-01-2
7 Acetoaceta-m-xylidide 97-36-9
8 N-(4-chloro-2,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-oxo-butanamide 4433-79-8
9 N-(Sulphophenyl)-3-methylpyrazolone 89-36-1
total 2425 MT/Month
10 Barbituric acid 67-52-7

11 5-Acetoacetylamino benzimidazolone 26576-46-5
12 1,4-bisacetoacetylaminobenzene 110-63-4
13 5-Aceto acetyl benzimidazolone 26576-46-5
14 1-(p-tolyl)-3-methyl-5-pyrazolone 86-92-0
15 Tetrachlorophthalic anhydride 117-08-8
16 2,6-diamino toluidine 823-40-5
17 P-Phenylenediamine 106-50-3
18 3-methyl-1-phenylpyrazolone 1131-18-6
19 3-Oxo-N-phenylbutanamide 86349-51-1
TABLE: 2.2
DETAILS OF SOLVENTS STORED FOR PROJECT
Sr. Name of solvents Maximum Quantity stored
No. (in MT)
1. DCT/ONT 100 MT
2. MEK 10 MT
3. IBA 20 MT
4. XYLENE 20 MT
5. MCB 20 MT
2.3.2.1 RAW MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING

The details of storage and handling of raw materials are given in table no.2.3.
2.3.3 TRANSPORTATION OF RAW MATERIALS AND FINISHED PRODUCTS
The raw materials and finished goods will be transported through tankers and trucks. There is well
developed road structure in Panoli as well as within premises also. The raw material source will be
standard manufacturer or supplier. Indicative list along with mode of transportation is included in table
no. 2.4.
TABLE: 2.3
DETAILS OF RAW MATERIAL STORAGE
Name of the Raw State Storage MOC Capacity of Maximum
Materials storage storage
capacity
Catalyst Solid Carboys HDPE 50 Ltr 5 MT

DCT/ONT Liquid Tank MS 20 KL each 100 MT
Solid Bag HDPE 25 kg/ 600 kg
Phthalic Anhydride Jambo bag 600 MT
Ammonium Carbonate Liquid Tank SS304
50 % Sintex 30 MT 100 MT
Cuprosus Chloride Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 20 MT
Urea Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg/45 Kgs 350 MT
Amm. Molybdate Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 2.5 MT
total 2425 MT/Month
Fresh Sulfuric acid Liquid Tank MS 20 KL 25 MT

CPC Crude Solid Jambo Bag HDPE 450 Kg 18 MT
72 % sulfuric acid Liquid Tank MSRL 100 KL 150 MT
Caustic Soda Solid Bag HDPE 50 Kg 18 MT
Oleic Acid Liquid Carboys HDPE 90 Kgs 3 MT
Additive Solid Bags HDPE 50 Kgs 15 MT
MEK Liquid TANK MS 10 KL 10 MT
Xylene MS 20 KL 20 MT
IBA MS 20 KL 20 MT
Caustic Flakes Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 10 MT
Rosin Solid Drum GI 240 Kg 20 MT
HCl Liquid Tank HDPE 20 KL 20 MT
Aluminum Chloride Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 15 MT
Sodium Chloride Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 5 MT
C.P.C Solid Jambo Bag HDPE 450 kg 18 MT
CuCl2 Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 10 MT
Chlorine gas Gas Tonner MS 900 Kg 18 MT
Caustic Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 10 MT
HCl Liquid Tank HDPE 20 KL 20 MT
M.C.B Liquid Tank MS 20 KL 20 MT
HCl (35% Liquid Tank HDPE 20 MT
concentration) 20 KL
Sodium Nitrite Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 10 MT
Base (Amine) Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 5 MT
Caustic Flakes Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 5 MT
Couple Solid Bag HDPE 50 kg 1 MT
TABLE: 2.4
DETAILS OF RAW MATERIAL AVAILABILITY
Name of the Raw Materials Availability Mode of transport
Catalyst Indigenous By road

DCT/ONT Indigenous By road
Phthalic Anhydride Indigenous By road
Ammonium Carbonate 50 % Indigenous By road
Cuprosus Chloride Indigenous By road
Urea Indigenous By road
Amm. Molybdate Indigenous By road
Fresh Sulfuric acid Indigenous By road
CPC Crude Indigenous By road
72 % sulfuric acid Indigenous By road
Caustic Soda Indigenous By road
Oleic Acid Indigenous By road
Additive Indigenous By road
MEK
Xylene
IBA Indigenous By road
Caustic Flakes Indigenous By road
Rosin Indigenous By road

total 2425 MT/Month
HCl Indigenous By road

Aluminum Chloride Indigenous By road
Sodium Chloride Indigenous By road
C.P.C Indigenous By road
CuCl2 Indigenous By road
Chlorine gas Indigenous By road
Caustic Indigenous By road
HCl Indigenous By road
M.C.B Indigenous By road
HCl (35% concentration) Indigenous By road
Sodium Nitrite Indigenous By road
Base (Amine) Indigenous By road
Caustic Flakes Indigenous By road
Couple Indigenous By road
TABLE: 2.5
LIST OF ETP CHEMICALS
Capacity
Storage
Name of Raw Material State Max. storage CAS NO MOC
Mode
at site
LIME Powder Bags 200 MT 1305-78-8 HDPE
DEFOAMER Liquid Carboys 5 MT --- HDPE
PREMIER 56 Liquid Drum 10 MT --- MS
SULFURIC ACID 98 % Liquid Tanker 20 MT 7664-93-9 MS

total 2425 MT/Month
2.4 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

2.4.1 MANUFACTURING PROCESS
MANUFACTURING PROCESS, CHEMICAL REACTION & MASS BALANCE
1. CPC Blue:
Manufacturing Process:
 Charge Ortho Nitro Toluene/ Dichloro Toluene in vessel with Phthalic anhydride add the
Ammonium Carbonate in it. Remove the water of reaction at elevated temperature.
 Take the mass in GLR and add ONT/DCT, Urea, Cuprous Chloride and Ammonium
Molybdate to it.
 Complete the reaction at elevated temperature and confirm the completion of reaction.
 Scrub ammonia and carbon dioxide gases evolved during process to water scrubber to
get solution of ammonia carbonate.
 Dump the crude mass of CPC into venulett and distill out unreacted ONT/DCT under
vacuum.
 Charge crude CPC in MSRL vessel in water and add Mother liquor of alpha blue
containing 25 to 28% Sulphuric Acid and 98% fresh sulfuric acid and raise the
temperature to 850C.
 Filter the material through in PP filter press.
 Wash the wet cake with hot water.
 Dry the material in spin flash dryers and pack.

total 2425 MT/Month
CHEMICAL REACTION:
MASS BALANCE

total 2425 MT/Month
COPPER SULPHATE AND AMMONIUM SULPHATE
Input Kg OutPut Kg
Amm. Carbonate solution 50% 245 Ammonium

CPC ML (Spent Sulfuric acid) 4360 Sulphate Solution Losses 19
preparation CO2 to Atmosphere 56
Filter Press Copper Earth Plant Growth regulator 275
Sulphuric Acid 5 Copper Sulphate 28

Copper Sulphate
Solvent 500 Solvent recycle 495
losses 37
Condensate Water Recycle to CPC 2800

Amm. Carbonate solution 50% 270 MEE Vapour Loss 518
25% sulfuric acid 280 CO2 Loss 62
Ammonium Sulphate 1000

Rotary Dryer
Losses 370
TOTAL 5660 TOTAL 5660
2. Beta Blue
 Charge CPC blue in the ball mill and carry out grinding.
 Charge CPC blue in to the MS vessel and add, Rosin, Xylene/IBA/MEK, Caustic and Beta
adhesive and reflux the mass. (Xylene/IBA/MEK is recovered through distillation)
 Transfer the mass in a vessel containing the water and treat the slurry using HCl and live steam,
Filter the Slurry through filter press and give wash to wet cake using water.
 Filter the mass through the filter press and give a wash of water to wet cake
 Dry the wet cake through spin flash drying.
 Pack the product.

total 2425 MT/Month
Chemical Reaction:
BETA BLUE MASS BALANCE
Input Kgs Out Put Kgs
CPC Crude 1030

Grinding Ball Mill
Water 3000
MEK/Xylene/IBA 2000 Rec MEK/Xylene/IBA 1940
Caustic Flakes 30 Pigmentation Solvent losses 60
Rosin 90 Losses others 150
Steam 1000
HCl 80 Purification
Water 5000
Water 15000 Filtration Waste water 22000

Losses 450
Beta Blue 1000

Drying
Losses 1630

total 2425 MT/Month
3. Alpha Blue
 Charge CPC blue in the ball mill and carry out grinding.
 Charge 72% Sulphuric acid or 98 % Sulphuric acid in GLR and add required quantity of CPC blue
keeping temperature below 50C.
 Continue stirring till CPC gets dissolved in acid.
 Test on microscope for dissolution.
 Transfer the batch in another vessel containing sufficient water to make final concentration of
25% to 30% acid.
 Filter the mass in filter press and wash with water.
 Charge wet cake in vessel containing water and add dispersing agent
 Heat with live steam and bring pH to neutral with help of caustic soda and then maintain
temperature of 95 C for four hours.
 Filter the slurry and wash with water.
 Wet cake is dried through spin flash dryer and packed.
Chemical Reaction:

total 2425 MT/Month
ALPHA BLUE MASS BALANCE
Input Kg Out Put Kgs
CPC Crude 1000

Grinding Ball Mill
1000
72 % Sulphuric Acid 7050 M S Jacketed

Vessel
8050
Drowning in
Water 10000 HDPE/Sintex
STEAM 1000 tank
19050
Water for Washing 65000 25-30 % H2SO4 15100

Flitration and
Washing Waste Water 65000
LOSSES 2050
1900
Caustic Soda 45
Oleic Acid 21
Water 10000 Pigmentation
Steam 1000
Additive 80
13046
Water 15000 P P Filter Press Losses 946

Waste water 25400
Alpha Blue 1000

Spin Flash Dryer
Losses 700

total 2425 MT/Month
4. Pigment Green-7
CHLORINATION:
Check Glass lined vessel thoroughly it should be empty and cleaned.
Aluminum Chloride and refined salt is charged in the Glass lined reactor. The mass is melted and copper
phthelocyanine blue are charged slowly by cold oil circulation in the jacket of the glass lined reactor.
Then Chlorine gas is purged to the reaction mass. After completion of chlorination the above mass is
transferred in the Drowning vessel.
DROWNING VESSEL:
Take water .and receive the above mass slowly in two Hrs. Than start filtration immediately.
FILTER PRESS:
Filter above mass and give hot water washes up to 3.0 pH and give cold water wash up to neutral pH
and further give water wash. And start aeration and dump the wet cake in SS-316 make trollies.
PIGMETATION PROCESS :
Take water in the SS vessel and charge above crude wet cake and add Mono chloro Benzene / Xylene
along with the additives. Reflux the mass for 8 hrs. and distilled out the Mono Chloro Benzene / Xylene.
FILTER PRESS:
Filter the pigmented mass and wash the cake with water till neutral pH.
SPIN FLASH DRYER:
Dry the wet cake in spin flash dryer.

total 2425 MT/Month
MANUFACTURING PROCESS OF CPC GREEN-7

INPUT Kgs OUTPUT Kgs
Aluminium Chloride 2800

HCl solution (22%) to reuse
Salt 600 710
generated from scrubber
chlorination Hypo chlorite generated from
C.P.C 800 469
scrubber
CuCl2 110
Chlorine gas 1850
HCl solution (10% to 12%) to reuse

Water 22000 110
Drowning generated from scrubber
HCl solution from scrubber 820
Waste water 43642

Wash Water 40000
Filtration Aluminium chloride solution
20000
[Polly Aluminium chloride ]
Recyled Water from previous batch 2000

M.C.B 7000 Distill water recovered in next batch 2000
Caudtic lye 105 M.C.B 6935
Pigmentation
Olic acid 35
Additive 50
Steam 4000
Filtration
Water wash 25000 Wastewater 30169
Green-7 1440
Dryer
Loss 1695
107170 107170

total 2425 MT/Month
Brief Process of Copper Extraction from Green – 7 Effluent of Aluminum Chloride Solution (PAC).
During Pigment Green – 7 process first stream of Acidic Aluminum chloride solution also known as Polly
Aluminium Chloride effluents is collected in copper recovery plant. Here we mix “Copper Extractor” liquid
solution, at where copper is extracted.
The aqueous layer which is copper free aluminum chloride solution also known as Polly Aluminium
Chloride we send to our Aluminum Hydroxide plant and/or direct sell to endusers.
The copper contained extract solution is further treated with 70 % Diluted sulphuric acid. This will form
copper sulphate solution and the extractor will separate out for recycle in next lot.
Copper sulphate solution is recrystallized at low temperature and it will give crystal of copper sulphate as
CuSO4; 5H2O will be filter and dry and pack for sale.
MATERIAL BALANCE OF COPPER EXTRACTION
INPUT Kg OUTPUT Kg
Aluminium chloride solution
[Polly Aluminium chloride ] 20000 Copper rich solvent layer 1720
EXTRACTION Aluminium chloride solution
Solvent(Recycled) 1598 [Polly Aluminium chloride ] 19880
Fresh solvent 2
total 21600 total 21600
COPPER SULFATE MANUFACTURING PROCESS
INPUT Kg OUTPUT Kg
Copper rich solvent

layer 1720 Uppper Solvent layer 1598
ML from previous
stage 270 REACTOR Reaction mass 750
H2SO4(70%) 192 Evaporation loss 2
Water 168
INPUT Kg OUTPUT Kg
Reaction mass 750 Copper sulfate crystal 480
CRYSTALLIZATION Recycle to next batch 270
total 750 total 750
total 2425 MT/Month
MANUFACTURING PROCESS OF ALUMINIUM HYDROXIDE FROM EFFLUANT OF ALUMINIUM

CHLORIDE SOLUTION:
Aluminium Chloride solution known as PAC is generated during CPC Green synthesis is passed through
the copper removal stage. After removal of the copper, decopperization green mother liquor. Neutralise
with soda ash between 6.5 to 7.5. Aluminium hydroxide slurry will filter in filter press to remove undesired
salts. After washing with water press cake is dried in spin flash dryer and packed into desired packing
size.
Chemical Reaction
6AlCl3 + 9Na2Co3 + 3H2O 2Al2(CO3)3 + 2Al(OH)3 + 18NaCl + 3CO2
ALUMINIUM HYDROXIDE MANUFACTURING PROCESS
INPUT Kg OUTPUT Kg
Aluminium chloride solution Aluminium Hydroxide wet

[Polly Aluminium chloride ] 19880 cake 3500
20% soda ash solution 12000
NEUTRALIZATION Waste water to ETP 40380
Fresh Water 12000
INPUT Kg OUTPUT Kg
Aluminium Hydroxide wet
cake 3500 DRYING Aluminium Hydroxide 1500
Loss 2000
Total 3500 Total 3500

total 2425 MT/Month
REPRESENTATIVE OF AZO PIGMENTS
5. Azo Pigment Yellow-12

Amino compound 3, 3, Dichloro Benzidine is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric acid. Then
it is coupled with coupler compound Aceto acetanilide at low temperature at certain fix pH. Finally it is
heated at temp. 85-90 0C maintains for 2-3 hours and filter it out. After filtration raw water washing is
done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and pulverized to obtain finish product.
Chemical Reaction:

total 2425 MT/Month
Mass Balance & Process Flow Diagram of YELLOW-12
Water 1950
HCl 486
Sodium Nitrite 235 Diazotization
Ice 7000
DCB 405
Water 650
AAA 590
Emulsifier 10
Sodium AC. 562 Coupling
Ice 3000
AA 8
Caustic Lye 130
Steam 2000
Wash Water 10000 Wastewater 23676

Filtration
Vapour 2350
Dryer
YELLOW-12 1000
Blender
TOTAL 27026 27026

total 2425 MT/Month

Amino compound 3:3 Di Chloro Benzidine is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric
acid. Then it is coupled with coupler compound Acetoacet-2:4-diethylanilide at low temperature at
certain fix pH. Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintain for 2 – 3 hours and filter it out. After
filtration raw water washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and
pulverized to obtain finish product.
Chemical Reaction:

total 2425 MT/Month
Water 3704
HCl 657
Ice 7407
3:3 DCB 384
Water 2593
AAMX 616
Water 1542 Coupling
Caustic Lye 421
Ice 4630
Steam 9259
Wash Water 13889 Waste Water 42176

Filtration
Vapour 2148
Dryer
YELLOW-13 1000
Blender
TOTAL 45324 45324

total 2425 MT/Month

Amino compound 3, 3-Dichlorobenzidine is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric acid.

Then it is coupled with coupler compound Acetoacetate Ortho Toluidine at low temperature at
certain fix pH. Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintains for 2–3 hours and filters it out. After
filtration raw water washing up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and pulverized to
obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction

total 2425 MT/Month
Water 3788
HCl 1056
Ice 8081
3:3 DCB 404
Water 4545
AAMX 596
Emulsifier 30
Coupling
Caustic Lye 525
Ice 15152
Steam 10101
AA 303

Filtration
Vapour 2434
Dryer
YELLOW-14 1000
Blender
TOTAL 54904 54904

total 2425 MT/Month
8. Red-2
Amino compound 2, 5-Dichloroaniline is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric acid. Then it
is coupled with coupler compound 3- hydroxy-2-Naphthanilide at low temperature at certain fix pH.
Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintains for 2-3 hours and filters it out. After filtration raw water
washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and pulverized to obtain finish
powder.
Chemical Reaction:

total 2425 MT/Month
Mass Balance & Process Flow Diagram of RED-2
Water 2525
HCl 1263
Ice 5051
DCA 379
Water 24242
NaPHAS 561
Coupling
Emulsifier 61
Steam 10101
Caustic lye 596

Filtration
Vapour 2558
Dryer
RED-2 1000
Blender
TOTAL 60098 60098

total 2425 MT/Month
9. Red-3
Amino compound 3 nitro 4 toluidine is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric acid. Then
it is coupled with coupler compound Beta Nephtol at low temperature at certain fix pH. Finally it is
heated at temp. 85-90oC maintains for 2–3 hours and filters it out. After filtration wash raw water
up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and pulverized to obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction:

Water 1683
HCl 1980
Ice 7921
3 Nitro 4 Toludine 505
Water 18317
B Naphthol 482
Coupling
CaCL2 482
Bi carb 421
Caustic lye 317

Filtration
Vapour 2366
Dryer
RED-3 1000
Blender
TOTAL 42184 42184

10. Red-4
Amino compound ortho chloro para nitro aniline is diazotized in the presence of dilute
Hydrochloric acid. Then it is coupled with coupler compound Beta Naphthol at low temperature
at certain fix pH. Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintains for 2–3 hours and filters it out.
After filtration raw water washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and
pulverized to obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction:

Water 1582
HCl 1739
Ice 8081
OCPNC 567
Water 7071
B Naphthol 442
Coupling
HCl 475
ICE 5556
Caustic lye 318

Filtration
Vapour 2343
Dryer
RED-4 1000
Blender
TOTAL 51312 51312

11. Orange-5
Amino compound 2:4 Dinitro Aniline is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric acid.
Then it is coupled with coupler compound Beta naphthol at low temperature at certain fix pH.
Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintains for 2-3 hours and filters it out. After filtration raw
water washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried in dryer and pulverized to
obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction:

Mass Balance & Process Flow Diagram of ORANGE-5
2:4 DNA 585

H2SO4 2400
Water 3000 Diazotization
ICE 12000
Nitrite 254
Beta Nahthol 415

Water 12000
Steam 8000 Coupling
caustic 246
HCL 900
Filtration
Wash Water 14500 waste Water 50770
Drying & Loss 2530

Blanding Orange 5 1000
TOTAL 54300 54300

12. Orange-34
Amino compound 3:3’ Dichloro Benzidine is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric
acid. Then it is coupled with coupler compound 1-p- tolyl 3-methylpyrazole-5-one at low
temperature at certain fix pH. Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintain for 2-3 hours and
filter it out. After filtration raw water washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried
in dryer and pulverized to obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction:

DCB 380
HCL 760
Water 4000 Diazotization
ICE 5000
Nitrite 220
3 Methyl 1 phynyl 5 pyrozolone

620
Water 6000
Steam 20000
Coupling
caustic 210
Emulsifier 10
ICE 6500
Filtration
Wash Water 20000 waste Water 60400
Drying & Loss 2300

Blanding Orange 34 1000
TOTAL 63700 63700

13. Orange-13
Amino compound 3:3’ Dichloro Benzene is diazotized in the presence of dilute Hydrochloric
acid. Then it is coupled with coupler compound 3 methyl 1 phenyl 5 Pyrazolone at low
temperatures at certain fix pH. Finally it is heated at temp. 85-90oC maintain for 2-3 hours and
filter it out. After filtration raw water washing is done up to neutral pH. Finally wet cake is dried
in dryer and pulverized to obtain finish powder.
Chemical Reaction:

Water 4000
HCl 830
DCB 415
ICE 5000
Water 6000
PMP 585
Caustic lye 350 Coupling
EMULSIFIER 10
STEAM 15000
ICE 2000

Filtration
Vapour 2300
Dryer
ORANGE-13 1000
Blender
TOTAL 49433 49433

2.5 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT
2.5.1 LAND
Total Plot area of the unit is 99002 sq.mt. Unit will provided 33052 sq.mt green belt area within
premises. Land use break up of total plot area is given in table no: - 2.6. Land possession document is
attached as ANNEXURE-IV. Area statement is also covered in ANNEXURE-III.
TABLE: 2.6
LAND USE BREAK UP OF TOTAL PLOT AREA

2.5.2 WATER
Unit has proposed to manufacture of 2425 MT/Month. Total water requirement will be 2710 KLD. Unit
will use 2460 KLD fresh water & 250 KLD recycle water. Unit is in the process of obtaining permission
from GIDC. Water consumption permission letter is attached as ANNEXURE-V.
TABLE: 2.7
CATEGORY-WISE WATER REQUIREMENT
Total after Remarks
Existing Proposed
Category Expansion
KLD (Additional)KLD
KLD
A. Domestic 20 70 90 Fresh Water
B. Gardening 77.5 22.5 100 Fresh Water
C. INDUSTRIAL
Fresh:- 1250
Process 240 1260 1500 KLD +Recycled:-
250 KLD
Boiler 250 20 270 Fresh Water
Cooling 100 450 550 Fresh Water
Washing 12.5 87.5 100 Fresh Water
Others - 100 100 Fresh Water
Industrial Total 602.5 1917.5 2520
Fresh :- 2460
Grand Total (A+B+C) 700 2010 2710 KLD + Recycled
:- 250 KLD

Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli, and District: Bharuch,
Gujarat for the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals with total 2425 MT/Month
WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM
Total Water Requirement (2710 KLD) (Fresh water: - 2460 KLD Fresh + 140 KLD MEE condensate + 110 KLD Internal Recycled)
Process 1500 KLD Scrubber

Cooling Tower
Boiler Gardeni
(Fresh: - 1250 KLD + MEE (100 KLD) Fresh (550 KLD) Fresh Washing Domestic
(270 KLD Fresh) ng
condensate: - 140 KLD + (100 KLD (100
(90 KLD
Internal Recycled:-110 KLD) Fresh) KLD)
74 KLD as inorganic
Fresh)
Fresh
products sell and recycled
into process again 10 KLD Sewage Water
Steam – 230 Loss 75 KLD
110 KLD 218 KLD KLD to 450 KLD
Reused sulphuric acid manufacturi Loss
from CPC Blue ng process
26 KLD ammonium
plant
carbonate solutions
Waste Water Cooling Tower Blow
1420 KLD Boiler Blow Washing Water
Down -100 KLD
100 KLD
Down 30 KLD
MEE + Dryer (244 KLD)
Effluent- Utility Scrubber

10 KLD Loss
1310 KLD Loss: - 54 KLD 30 KLD
Ammonium sulfate: - 140 KLD MEE condensate
50 MT recycled to process 20 KLD Ash Quenching &
Coal Handling
EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (1585 KLD)
M/.s NCTL (1585 KLD)

2.5.3 FUEL & ENERGY REQUIREMENT

The Fuel &energy requirement in terms of fuel and power for proposed unit is shown in following table
no.2.8 & 2.9.
TABLE: 2.8
FUEL CONSUMPTION REQUIREMENT
Existing
Sr. requirement as per Proposed Total
Particulars
No. Existing Consent – (Increased / Decreased) requirement
AWH- 96796
1. Electricity (HP) 4000 KVA + 2000 KVA 6000 KVA
FUEL
1 Coal (MT/Day) 76 + 150 226
2 Natural Gas (Nm3/Hr.) 200 -- 200
3 HSD (Lit./Hour 0 + 220 220
2.5.3.1 DETAILS OFENERGY DISTRIBUTION

Details of energy distribution are covered in below table no. 2.9.
TABLE: 2.9
ENERGY DISTRIBUTION AFTER EXPANSION
Total Connected
Sr. No. Name of Equipment
Energy in HP
1. Pumps 3000
2. Reactors GLR/MSRL/MS/SS 3000
3. Air Compressor 600
4. SFD 1200
5. ETP 1800
6. Blender 300
7. Ball Mill 3070
8. Utility 1850
Total 14820

2.5.4 UTILITIES
Details of utilities are given in table no. 2.10.

TABLE: 2.10
DETAILS OF UTILITIES
Sr. Source of Stack Type Quantit Type of Emission Revised Air
no. emission Height of y of emission Standards Emission Pollution
With (meter) Fuel Fuel s i.e. Air norms for Control
Capacity MT/Day Pollutants CPA (80% Measures
of existing (APCM)
norms)
EXISTING AS PER CONSENT NO:- AWH-96796
150 120
PM
Boiler-2 nos. 36 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
1. 40 Coal SO2 ESP
(5 TPH each) MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
Thermic Fluid 150 120
PM
Heater-1 & 2 20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
2. 30 Coal SO2 ESP
(20 lakhs MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx
Kcal/hr.) 50 ppm 40 ppm
Thermic Fluid 150 120
PM
Heater-3 & 4 20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
3. 30 Coal SO2 ESP
(20 Lakhs MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx
Kcal/hr.) 50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
CPP-2 nos* PM Adequate
Natura 200 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
4. (Will be 30 SO2 stack
l Gas Nm3/Hr 100 ppm 80 ppm
removed) NOx Height
50 ppm 40 ppm
PROPOSED ADDITIONAL
150 120
PM
Boiler-1 no. 50 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
5. Coal SO2
(8 TPH) 30 MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx ESP
Meter 50 ppm 40 ppm
with water
[Com. 150 120
PM scrubber
Boiler-1 no. stack ] 80 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
6. Coal SO2
(10 TPH) MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
Thermic Fluid
150 120
Heater- PM ESP
20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
7. (2 Nos) 30 Coal SO2 with water
MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
(20 lakhs NOx scrubber
50 ppm 40 ppm
Kcal/hr. each)

150 120
PM Adequate
D G Set mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
8. 11 HSD 70 Lit/Hr SO2 Stack
(500 KVA) 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx Height
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
PM Adequate
D G Set 150 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
9. 11 HSD SO2 Stack
(1000 KVA) Lit/Hr 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx Height
50 ppm 40 ppm
2.5.5 EQUIPMENTS/ MACHINERIES

List of machineries is given in table no:-2.11
TABLE: 2.11
DETAILS OF EQUIPMENTS/MACHINERIES
Numbers of Equipment
Sr. No. Particulars Capacity
Existing After Expansion
3 stage water + 1 stage
1. 2 3 -
acidic scrubber
2. Alkali Purification Vessel 3 18 40 KL
3. Ball Mill 5 13 20 KL
4. Blender 4 10 3 MT
5. Drowning Vessel 3 10 30 KL
6. Filter Press 6 35 48" x 48"
7. Glass Lined Reactor 5 25 3 KL/12 KL
8. M S Distillation Vessel 2 6 25 KL
9. MSRL Vessels 9 30 40 KL
10. Rotary Vacuum Dryer 3 14 12 KL
11. S S Vessel 4 12 16 KL
12. Spin Flash Dryer 4 7 500 kg/Hr
13. SS Distillation Vessel 4 6 20 KL
14. Tray Dryer 4 6 200 Tray

2.5.6 MANPOWER
The manpower required for the project as well as during the construction/ commissioning activities will
be employed from the local area. The preference will be given to local people. The man-power
requirement is given in below table no. 2.12.
TABLE: 2.12
MAN POWER REQUIREMENT
No. of workers
Phase of project Type of labor
Existing Proposed Total
During construction Contractual 10 30 40
During commissioning Contractual 0 50 50
Managerial 20 5 25
During the operation Skilled 250 100 350
Un-Skilled 250 100 350
TOTAL 530 285 815
2.6 POLLUTION POTENTIAL SCENARIO

The details of pollution generation in terms of effluent generation, sewage generation, flue gas
emission, process emission and hazardous waste generation are covered in this section.
2.6.1 EFFLUENT AND SEWAGE GENERATION
Total wastewater generation will be 1725 KLD (Domestic: 75 KLD + Industrial: 1650 KLD). Out of 1650
KLD, 250 KLD effluent will be internally recycle & remaining 1585 KLD will be subjected to primary
NCTL- FETP facility.
TABLE: 2.13
CATEGORY-WISE WASTEWATER GENERATION
Proposed
Existing Total after
(Additional)
Category KLD Expansion KLD Remarks
KLD
Treated with industrial
Domestic 10 65 75
effluent
INDUSTRIAL
110 KLD will be reused
and 1310 KLD will be
Process 197 1223 1420
subjected to in-house
ETP.
Used for coal, handling
Boiler 3 27 30
and ash quenching

Cooling 12 88 100 Treated into in-house

ETP.
Washing 5 95 100
Total Industrial waste
217 1433 1650 -
water
Total wastewater
227 1498 1725 -
Generation
140 KLD treated water
Net treated water
reuse out of it 110 KLD
quantity discharge to 227 1358 1585
from process and 30
NCTL-FETP facility
KLD from Boiler
2.6.1.1 DETAILS OF EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

The effluent generated from the various areas will be:
 Process Waste water

 Washing from plant area.
 Utility Blow downs- Boiler, Cooling Tower
Effluent from manufacturing process, Utility, Equipment Washing, will be collected in collection cum
neutralization tank. Effluent will be neutralized by using of lime as per requirement till required pH
range obtained in neutralization tank. Then, effluent will be passed through a filter press. Filtrate will
be collected in collection tank and subjected to M/s NCTL-common effluent treatment plant. And
generated sludge will be dried by using of sludge drying bed and subjected to TSDF site Sludge from
filtrate and clarifier will be sent to M/s. BEIL, Ankleshwar or M/s ENVIRO CARE. Membership
Certificate is attached as ANNEXURE-VI.
Waste streams generated from spillage, leakages, vessel washing, used container washing etc. will be
collected in tank and send to effluent treatment plant.
Unit has applied for membership of 1600 KLD in new allotted NCTL capacity as per new GPCB
Circular. Unit will give primary and secondary treatment and after achieving NCTL inlet norm, unit will
discharge effluent to NCTL. NCTL is meeting its discharge norm. So, direction under section 18 (1) (b)
of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act, 1974 issued by CPCB regarding compliance of
CETP is not applicable.

TABLE: 2.15
EQUIPMENT LIST OF PROPOSED EFFLUENT TRETMENT PLANT WITH DIMENSION
SR NAME OF UNIT QUANTITY CAPACITY
NO
1. Lime addition tank 2 nos. 30 KL
2. Belt filter for gypsum 1 set. 8 KL/hrs
3. Filter Press for gypsum 3 no. 48” X 48”
4. Caustic lye tank 1 no. 20 KL
5. Neutralization cum equalization tank 1 no. 200 KL
6. Filter press before primary clarifier 3 nos. 36” X 36”
7. Sand Filter 2 no. 2.5Ø X 1.5
8. Primary Clarifier 2 no. 6ØX3
9. Sludge drying beds 4 nos. 4X8
10. Aeration tank 2 nos. 24 X 12 X 3.5
11. Secondary clarifier 2 no. 9ØX3
12. Sand Filter 3 no. 2.5Ø X 1.5
13. Activated Charcoal carbon filter 3 no. 2.5Ø X 1.5
14. Continuous Centrifuge 1 no. 2000 KG/Hr
15. Filter press (Final) 1 no. 48” X 48”
16. Pre final tank 2 no. 8 X 8 X 2.5
17. Storage Tank 3 no. 24 X 12 X 4
18. Final Discharge sump 1 no. 8 X 8 X 2.5
19. RO 1 no. 40 KL/ Hr
20. Reffinate storage tank 1 no. 40 KL
21. MEE 1 no. 10 KL/Hr
22. MEE 1 NOS 20 KL/Hr

TABLE: 2.16
STAGE WISE QUALITY AT CONVENTIONAL ETP
Sr. Parameter Unit Composite After After After Tertiary Discharge

No. Effluent Primary Secondary Treatment/ Carbon Norms
Inlet Treatment Treatment filter subjected to
discharge
1 pH -- 3-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 6.5 to 8.5
2 TDS mg/lit 5000-7000 8000-9000 8000-9000 8000-9000 10000
3 TSS mg/lit 150-250 <100 <40 <20 150
4 BOD mg/lit 800-1000 <600 <150 <100 200
5 COD mg/lit 5000-6000 <3500 <1500 <1000 1000
Ammonical
6 mg/lit <50 <50 <50 <50 50
Nitrogen
FIGURE: 2.1
FLOW DIAGRAM OF ETP
Over Flow
Over Flow
Neutralization
Effluent from
Tank/
process + Washing Clarifier- I Aeration Clarifier- II
Equalization
+ Domestic + Utility Tank-1
Tank /
Collection Tank Return
Sludge Sludge
Excess Sludge
For Sludge Drying For Dewatering
Dewatering Bed
Sludge to TSDF site
To M/s. NCT- FETP Activated Pressure

Carbon Filter Sand Filter

2.6.1.2 ECONOMICAL AND TECHNICAL VIABILITY OF THE EFFLUENT TREATMENT SYSTEM

TABLE: 2.17
DETAILS OF COST OF ETP PER YEAR
Sr. No. Detail Expenses in Rs. Expenses in Rs.
Monthly Annually
1 ETP O & M 2625000 31500000
2 Raw Material Consumption 815000 9780000
3 217 KLD effluent discharge in NCTL 385000 4620000
4 BEIL Infrastructur 48500 582000
5 ENVIRO CARE 37500 450000
6 ETP POWER COST 3750000 45000000
TOTAL(A) Rs. 7661000 91932000
Unit will allocate a certain amount of money towards environment health and safety department. This
will enable the management to smoothly run ETP plant. Thus proper management of ETP can be
carried out without having to worry about unit profit.
The annual turnover of the company will be around Rs. 1000 Crores. The ETP operational cost is Rs
3.67 Crores per year. This indicates financial viability of effluent treatment plant.
As charactestic shown in table 2.17, unit will achieve the CETP norm after neutralization.
Considering this, we can say that proposed effluent treatment system is economically & technically
viable.
2.6.2 GASEOUS EMISSIONS & CONTROL

2.6.2.1 FLUE GAS EMISSIONS
Existing unit has 2 Nos. of 5 TPH of coal fired boiler installed with APCM of E.S.P. with a stack height
of 40 m will be installed. Additionally 4 number of Thermic Fluid Heater (20 Lac Kcal/Hr) of Coal fired
installed with a stack of height of 30 m.
Proposed unit will be installed 8 TPH & 10 TPH of coal fired boiler installed with APCM of E.S.P. and
Water Scrubber with a stack height of 30 m will be installed. Additionally Two number of Thermic Fluid
Heater (20 Lac Kcal/Hr) of Coal fired installed with a stack of height of 30 m and 2 Nos. of D.G Set
[500 KVA + 1000 KVA] will be installed for Emergency propose . Flue gas emission detail is given in
table no:-2.18.

TABLE: 2.18
FLUE GAS EMISSIONS
Sr. Source of Stack Type Quantity Type of Emission Revised Air
no. emission of Fuel of Fuel emissions Standards Emission Pollution
Height i.e. Air norms for Control
With Capacity (meter) MT/Day Pollutants CPA (80% Measures
of
existing (APCM)
norms)
150 120
PM
mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
Boiler-2nos. 40 36
1. Coal SO2 ESP
(5 TPH each) MT/Day 100 ppm 80 ppm
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
ThermicFluid PM
20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
Heater-1 & 2 30 Coal ESP
2. MT/Day SO2
(20 lakhs 100 ppm 80 ppm
Kcal/hr.) NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
Thermic Fluid PM
20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
Heater-3 & 4 30 Coal ESP
3. MT/Day SO2
(20 Lakhs 100 ppm 80 ppm
Kcal/hr.) NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
PM
Natural mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 Adequate
30 200
4. CPP-2 nos. Gas SO2 stack
Nm3/Hr 100 ppm 80 ppm
Height
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
PROPOSED ADDITIONAL
150 120
PM
50 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
Boiler-1 no. (8 Coal
5. 30 Meter MT/Day SO2 ESP
TPH) 100 ppm 80 ppm
[Com. with water
NOx
stack ] 50 ppm 40 ppm
scrubber
80 PM 150 120
Boiler-1 no. Coal
6. MT/Day mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
(10 TPH) SO2

NOx 100 ppm 80 ppm
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
Thermic Fluid PM ESP
Heater- 20 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
7. (2 Nos) 30 Coal with water
MT/Day SO2
(20 lakhs 100 ppm 80 ppm
scrubber
Kcal/hr. each) NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
PM
mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 Adequate
8. D G Set 11 HSD 70 Lit/Hr SO2 Stack
(500 KVA) 100 ppm 80 ppm
Height
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
150 120
PM
mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 Adequate
9. D G Set 11 HSD 150 Lit/Hr SO2 Stack
(1000 KVA) 100 ppm 80 ppm
Height
NOx
50 ppm 40 ppm
* We are removing CPP [power plant].
2.6.2.2 PROCESS EMISSIONS
PM will be a possible source of process gas emission. Process gas emission detail is given in table
no:-2.19.
TABLE: 2.19
PROCESS EMISSIONS AND CONTROL MEASURES
Sr. Source of Stack Type of Emission Revised Air Pollution
no. emission Height emissions Standards Emission Control Measures
With Capacity (meter) i.e. Air norms for CPA (APCM)
Pollutants (80% of existing
norms)
Reactors of CPC 20
3 stage water
1. Blue Plant (4 Nos (Common Ammonia 175 mg/Nm3 140 mg/Nm3
Scrubber
of reactor) Stack)
Cyclone followed
Spin Flash Dryer 15
2. SPM 150 mg/Nm3 120 mg/Nm3 by Bag filter
(4 Nos of SFD) (Each)
PROPOSED ADDITIONAL
20
Reactor of CPC
(Common 3 stage water
3. Blue Plant (10 Ammonia 175 mg/Nm3 140 mg/Nm3
Stack) Scrubber
Nos.)
4. Reactor of CPC 15 Cl2 9 mg/Nm3 7 mg/Nm3 Water scrubber

Green-7 [Glass (Common HCl 20 mg/ Nm3 16 mg/ Nm3 followed by Alkali
Lined reaction Stack) Scrubber
vessels no. 6]
15
Drowning
5. (Common 20 mg/ Nm3 16 mg/ Nm3 Water scrubbers
Vessels (4Nos.) HCl
Stack)
Spin Flash Dryer SPM Cyclone followed
6. 15 (Each) 150 mg/Nm3 120 mg/Nm3
(3 Nos.) by Bag filter
2.6.2.3 FUGITIVE EMISSION

The possible sources of fugitive emission are given in table No. 2.20.
TABLE: 2.20
DETAILS OF FUGITIVE EMISSION CONTROL MEASURES
Sr. Source Probable Pollutant Control Measures/ APCM

No. Emission
FUGITIVE EMISSION
1 Handling of raw Air pollutant  i) Provision of exhaust ventilation
material bags in (PM)  ii) Provision of PPE.
storage area  iii) Provision of Job rotation to reduce exposure.
2 Solid raw material Air pollutant Hopper will be provided with powder transfer system.
transferring to (PM)
reactor
3 Solvent Recovery Air Pollutant (VOC) i) Solvent recovery system with steam condensation
System system.
ii) Pump are mechanical seal type.
4 Solvent storage tank Air Pollutant (VOC) i) Carry out workplace area monitoring to find out
concentration level in ambient air close handling
system.
ii) Provision of breather valve cum flame arrester.
5 Flange joints of Air pollutant  i) Routine &periodic inspection to check leakage.

pipeline, pump & (VOC)
motors  ii) Preventive maintenance, Follow SOP for
maintenance.
 iii) Pumps will be mechanical seal type.
 iv) LDAR program will be followed.
 Provision of Flange guard.

Sr. Source Probable Pollutant Control Measures/ APCM

No. Emission
6 Liquid raw material Air pollutant  Feeding of liquid raw material will be carried out by
transferring to (VOC)
reactor closed pipeline and mechanical seal pump.
7 Loading /unloading Air pollutant  Unloading through pipeline to tank in a close system.
at storage area (VOC)
Regular ambient air quality monitoring will be carried out within premises and nearby area for PM10,
PM2.5, SOX, NOX, and VOC in the downwind directions as well as where maximum ground level
concentration is anticipated and record of the same shall be maintained.
To control other fugitive emissions following measures are recommended:
A. Controlled emissions and provision ofPPE for the workers.
B. Provision of mechanical seal in pumps.
C. Regular inspection of tank roof seals.
D. Adequate measures for the minimization/prevention of the fugitive emission.
E. Regular maintenance of valves, pumps and other equipment to prevent leakage.
F. Entire process to be carried out in the closed reactors with proper maintenance of temperature.
G. Regular periodic monitoring of work area to check the fugitive emission.
H. Adequate stack heights as per the CPCB estimation will be provides at all locations to reduce
GLCs of pollutants.
I. Air Pollution Control System will be installed in the plant.
2.6.3 SOLID &HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

The following type of hazardous waste will be generated from the operational activities. All the waste
will be stored separately in a designated storage area. The details of hazardous waste are given in
table no.2.21.

TABLE: 2.21
DETAILS OF HAZARDOUS WASTE
Quantity in MT/Annum
Type of Existing
Sr. Source of Method of
Hazardous Category as per Proposed
No. waste generation CCA- (Increased/ Total Disposal
AWH- Decreased)
96796
Collection,
Storage,
Transportation
1. Gypsum
ETP 26.1 6000 +1100 7100 and send to
Waste
cement industry
or send it to
TSDF –BEIL.
Collection,
storage,
2. ETP sludge 35.3 720 +280 1000 transportation &
ETP
disposal at
TSDF-BEIL
Collection,
storage
&transportation
3. Lubrication of
Used Oil 5.1 1.200 +3.8 5.0 and selling to
machinery
recyclers
authorized by
GPCB.
From packing Collection,
Discarded
4. of products 3000 10,000 Storage and
containers/ 33.1 +7000 nos
and raw nos nos disposed of by
drums/ liners
material sending it to
Storage of authorized
5. Discarded
product & 33.1 0 4 Lakh 4 Lakh decontamination
liners
raw material facility/ recycler
or reused by unit
Storage of or send back to
6. 30000
Jumbo Bags product & 33.1 0 30000 Nos. supplier or
Nos.
raw material disposal at
TSDF-BEIL
Spent Collection,
7. From Alpha
Sulphuric D-II 6000 +16650 22650 Storage, and
Blue plant
Acid (25- reused within the

30%) premises in the

manufacturing of
CPC Blue. &
Seal to rule-9
Collection,
Storage, and
Spent reused within the
8. From CPC
Sulfuric acid D-II -- +78480 78480 premises in the
Plant
(10% to 12%) manufacturing of
Ammonium
Sulphate.
Collection,
Storage
9. Dust Iron Air
Bag Filter 26.2 2.4 +0.6 3.0 Transportation
Filtration
and Disposal at
TSDF-BEIL.
Collection,
Storage
10. From ETP- Transportation
Spent Carbon 28.3 -- +5 5
Carbon Filter and send for co-
processing /
Incineration.
2.6.3.1 HAZARDOUS WASTE AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT AS PER NOTIFICATION 2016
Waste is an unavoidable byproduct of human activity. Economic development, rapid urbanization &
improved living standards have led to the increase in quantity & complexity of the waste generated.
Proper disposal of waste is essential for preservation and improvement of public health.
Solid waste management is one of the most essential services for maintaining the quality of life in the
plant and for ensuring better standards of health and sanitation. Solid waste generated in the plant
area can be handled under two main categories, namely domestic wastes and industrial wastes.
Effective measures shall be taken to effectively implement the solid waste management systems in the
plant. Solid waste will be handed over to authorized vendor for disposal.
The Hazardous wastes shall be handled and disposed as per Hazardous Waste (Management and
Handling) Rules, 2016.
The Waste Management plan includes:
• Waste Inventory
• Classification of waste

• Packaging, Storing and Transporting Wastes to Disposal site

• Data Management and Reporting -Personnel Training
• Waste Minimization
General Guidelines for Waste Management:
1. Solid waste
 The solid waste shall be segregated as bio-degradable and non-biodegradable.
 The organic waste shall be segregated and handed over to outside authorized agency for
disposal.
 The non-biodegradable (inorganic) waste shall be handed over to authorized recycler for
further handling and disposal.
 Reuse of paper and plastic waste.
 Planned system for waste collection, segregation and disposal.
 E-waste will be disposed as per E-Waste (Management) Rule, 2016.
2. Hazardous waste
 Hazardous waste will be stored as per the guidelines in proper storage room and handed over to
authorized vendor for final disposal.
 The collection, treatment and disposal of hazardous waste will be as per Hazardous waste
(Management and Handling) Rules 2016, and hence no adverse impact on land environment is
envisaged.
 It is proper management it will be stored separately in dry & covered place with RCC plat form.
There will be provision of separately storage area.
 Forklift truck will be used in shifting, loading and unloading operation for hazardous waste to
minimize manual handling of hazardous waste.
 Necessary PPE’s shall be provided to workers while handling of hazardous waste.
 The details of quantity of hazardous waste generated and disposal facility is given in Chapter 2
in section 2.6.3.
2.6.3.2 METHODOLOGY FOR DECONTAMINATION
For disposal of discarded bags and containers, the guideline provided by the Gujarat Pollution Control
Board will be followed. It will be ensured that containers are empty before taken for disposal. As per
the guidelines all the containers will be washed properly, the washings will be checked for pH and
COD. The pH should be neutral and COD should be NIL. This will ensure that the containers are
cleaned before taken for disposal. Removal or defacing of all labeling and content of all product and
waste material will be regular practice. The sticker will be put on individual container as "cleaned". The

container will be deposited in the area marked for disposal. Then the containers will be inspected by
the certifying agency approved by the GPCB. In confirmation of the quality of the cleaning they will
issue the stickers for identification. After receiving stickers, that should be pasted on to the containers.
Then the containers are disposed of to actual raw material supplier. Alternative, it will be disposal to
GPCB approval recycler.
FIGURE: 2.2
METHODOLOGY OF DECONTAMINATION
Contaminated contained
area
Water
Decontamination area
Effluent to
ETP
Clean Container area

FIGURE 2.3
PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING SITE



2.7 IMPORTANCE AND JUSTIFICATION OF PROJECT

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is a pigment group of India ventured into manufacture of synthetic
organic chemical. This Chemical is commonly used as a coloring agent in different substances. The
offered chemicals is processed by using optimum quality chemical and advanced technology as per
set market norms. This product is used into plastic, Rubber, Textile, Inks and paints industries.
2.7.1 PROJECT IMPLIMENTATION SCHEDULE
Implementation of Project within a pre-determined time frame is an important factor for the success of
a project. Timely implementation saves on various costs like interest, administrative overheads and
helps to realize the goals as per pre-determined objectives. Implementation of Project involves co-
ordination of different activities at various levels of the firm and amongst different outside agencies.
The project implementation schedule is given in table no.2.24.
This will start immediately after getting Environment Clearance. From the date of start, the
implementation schedule envisages completion of project in 8 months. It is considered that preliminary
activities such as obtaining necessary statutory clearance for proposed project and financial
arrangements for the implementation of the project will be made at proper dates.
The major activities to be carried out at site during project work are as follows.
TABLE: 2.24
PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
Project implementation schedule after getting NOC from GPCB
Sr. No. Activity Required Period
1. Civil work Immediately after getting NOC-8 Months
2. Procurement of machinery 4 month after getting NOC
3. Erection& installation of Immediately after competition of activity no.2
machinery - 4 month
4. Trial of machinery & Within 3 months after competition of activity no.3
equipment
5. Commercial activity 3 months after competition of activity no.4

FIGURE 2.4
BAR CHART
Commercial Activity
Trial of machinery & equipment
Erection & installation of machinery
Procurement of machinery
Civil Work
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Erection & Trial of

Procurement of Commercial
Civil Work installation of machinery &
machinery Activity
machinery equipment
Year After Getting NOC from GPCB 0.8 0.4 0.8 1.1 1.4
2.8 ODOUR MANAGEMENT PLAN

Odour Problem and Sources of Emissions
 Causes of odour can be bad sanitation, bacterial growth in the interconnecting pipes & unattended
drains etc.
Remedial Measures
 Better management to avoid staling.
 Use of sanitation biocides to minimize the growth of aerobic/anaerobic microorganisms.
 Steaming of major pipe lines.
 Proper cleaning of drains.
Following Additional methods can also be used to reduce odour nuisance:
 Green belt development in the buffer zone may help at least partially to mitigate / obfuscate the
Odour.
 Ensuring that the operation is carried out under the best management practices.
 If still the Odour persists, nozzles, sprayers and atomizers that spray ultra-fine particles of water or
chemicals can be used along the boundary lines of area sources to suppress odour.

2.9 FUGITIVE EMISSIONS MANAGEMENT PLAN

Fugitive emission sources and their control measures are shown in below table no. 2.25.
TABLE: 2.25
PROPOSED FUGITIVE EMISSION CONTROL MEASURES
Sr. Probable Source Proposed Control Measures

No.
1. Pump handling odorous  Use of mechanical seals of pumps and
chemicals and pressured compressor.
gases  All pipeline and pipe fitting shall be well maintain,
wear and tear shall be attended promptly.
2. At reactor during charging of  Liquid raw material will be charged by pumping and
liquid and solids chemicals closed loop.
3. Pressure release valve  For highly pressurized lines, vent lines of PRVs to
emission from pipeline air pollution control device in case of toxic gases.
4. Release from sampling lines  Using a close loop sampling system.
5. Emission from bulk storage  Breather valve, PSVs, Rupture disc will be
tank during unloading provided.
 Vapor recovery system will be installed for process
and storage vent tank.
6. Leak from valves, flanges,  Welded pipes will be used wherever feasible.
plugs and instrument  Suitable gasket material to be used.
connection.  Suitable gland packing will be used in valves.
 Periodic inspection and maintenance of pipes and
pipe fittings.
7. Chemical vapors from wet  Filtration will be done out in Agitated Neutsch filter.
cake in filtration and drying Transfer and drying of wet-cake done in system
area shall be adopted, worker shall be provided PPEs,
fume extraction system shall be provided,
whenever require.
8. Warehouse storing drums and  Spillages shall be strictly prevented by providing
bags dip pans, proper handling equipment, minimum

Sr. Probable Source Proposed Control Measures

No.
manual operation, local exhaust and roof top
ventilators.
 Spill control procedures and equipment shall be
provided.
2.10 DETAILS OF NON HAZARDOUS WASTE

Details of Non Hazardous waste is shown in below table no. 2.26.
TABLE: 2.26
DETAILS OF NON HAZARDOUS WASTE
Sr. Waste Quantity Mode of Disposal

No.
1. Glass Waste ( Z 13) 20 MT/Year Landfill site
2. Paper waste (Z44) 250 MT/Year Landfill site
3. Wooden Waste 500 MT/Year Authorized Scrap Vendors
4. E-waste 5 MT/Year Authorized E-Waste handlers

1CHAPTER 3
DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Table of Contents
3.1 Introduction 75
3.2 Windrose 78
3.3 Air Environment 81
3.3.1 Ambient Air Quality (Aaq) 81
3.3.1.1 Location Of Aaq Monitoring Stations 81
3.3.1.2 Base Line Data 83
3.4 Water Environment 86
3.5 Noise Environment 97
3.5.1 Reconnaissance 97
3.5.2 Methodology For Noise Monitoring 97
3.5.3 Noise Monitoring Locations 97
3.6 Soil Environment 100
3.6.1 Baseline Data 100
3.7 Land Use Pattern 102
3.8 Biological Environment & Socio –Economic 104
Environment
3.8.1 Ecological Information 104
3.8.2 Forest 104
3.8.3 Flora 104
3.8.4 Fauna 104
3.9 Socio-Economic Environment 110
3.9.1 Demographic Data Within The Region Of Interest 110
3.9.2 Literacy Rate 112
3.9.3 Occupational Structure 114
3.10 Traffic Survey 121
3.10.1 Reconnaissance 121
3.10.2 Traffic Survey Of The Study Area 121
3.10.3 Existing Traffic Scenario And Level Of Services(Up) 121
3.10.4 Existing Traffic Scenario And Level Of Services (Down) 122
Table of Tables
3.1 List Of Major Industries In The Ankleshwar 76
3.2 Meteorological Data 78
3.3 Details Of Sampling Location Of Ambient Air Quality 82
Monitoring
3.4 Ambient List Pollutant & Analytical Methods 82
3.5 Ambient Air Quality Status Of Study Area 84
3.6 Method Of Analysis 86
3.7 Details Of Ground Water Monitoring Locations 88
3.8 Water Quality Parameters (Ground Water Sources) 89
3.9 Details Of Surface Water Monitoring Locations 92

3.10 Water Quality Parameters (Surface Water Sources) 94
3.11 Noise Level Data 98
3.12 Cpcb Recommendations For Community Noise Exposure 99
3.13 Soil Quality Monitoring With Respect To The Project Site 100
3.14 Soil Quality Parameters 101
3.15 Areas Under Different Land Use 102
3.16 List Of Flora 105
3.17 List Of Fauna 105
3.18 Demographic Data 110
3.19 Population Density & Sex Ratio 112
3.20 Literacy Rate 113
3.21 Literacy Rate Within 10 Km Radial Distance Of Study 115
Area
3.22 Occupational Structure 115
3.23 Distribution Of Workers 118
3.24 Delhi To Mumbai Highway (Nh-8) 121
3.25 Level Of Service 122

3.26 Mumbai To Delhi Highway (Nh-8) 122
Table of Figures
3.1(A) Wind Rose Diagram For Period Of March- 2018 To May-2018 78
3.1(B) Wind Rose Diagram For Period Of March- 79

2018 To May-2018
3.2 Wind Class Frequency Disrtibution 80
3.3 Location Of Ambient Air Quality 81
Monitoring Stations
3.4 Location Of Ground Water Quality Monitoring Stations 87
3.5 Location Of Surface Water Quality 92

Monitoring Stations
3.6 Location Of Noise Monitoring Stations 98
3.7 Location Of Soil Monitoring Stations 100
3.8 Land Cover Map With Village Location 103
Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate,
Phase-IV, Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat for the manufacturing of synthetic
organic chemicals with total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER-3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 INTRODUCTION
It is essential to monitor the environment quality prevailing in the surrounding area before
implementation of the any project for assessing the environmental impacts. The Environment
status within the study area could be used for identification of significant environmental issues
to be addressed in the impact assessment study.
The impact from an existing industrial project on its surrounding environment are mainly
regulated by,
 The nature of the pollutants,
 Their quantities discharged to the environment,
 Existing environment quality
 Assimilative capacity of the surrounding environment and
 Topography and terrain of the project site.
In order to identify and establish the extent of likely impacts, it is necessary to gather
information on existing environmental quality relating to various components of the
environment.
Primary data were collected for baseline collection. Secondary data were also gathered for
remaining information like meteorological data, Socio-economic data, Ecological data and
Land use data. For the purpose of collection of primary data, study area was selected within 5
km radius taking project site as a center which also included towns and villages.
The main factor of local, sub-regional and regional meteorology that influence the air quality in
area of the proposed project are diurnal and seasonal wind pattern and wind direction,
humidity ,temperature etc.
Panoli is a very important industrial center having the advantage of due to NH-8 and Panoli
railway station, GIDC is well connected by road and rail to rest parts of the country.
Communication facility available in the area is good. Water is available from GIDC.
Panoli is large industrial estate with a number of chemical plants, paper mills, textile
processing plants and other allied industries totaling to about more than 500 units.
At present there are several industries located in this area. Lists of major industries in the
Panoli are given in Table 3.1.

TABLE: 3.1
LIST OF MAJOR INDUSTRIES IN THE PANOLI-GIDC
Sr. Name Of The Company Address
No.
1. Krishna Polymers Plot No: 227/3, Phase-i, Opp. Cheminova India
Ltd., G.I.D.C., Panoli- 393416, Gujarat, India.
2. Saffron Chemical Industries Plot No-3003, G.I.D.C., Near Gujrat Agro
Chemicals, Panoli - 393416, Gujarat, India
3. Yash Engineering Shed No. J-1415, G.I.D.C., Estate,, Panoli -
394116, Gujarat, India
4. P K Intermediates Pvt. Ltd. C1b 1906 & 1907 G.I.D.C. Panoli, Dist -
Bharuch, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
5. Shreeji Chemical Industries Plot No- 506, G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli District-
Bharuch, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
6. Vrundavan Chemicals C1-b 407/6, G.I.D.C. Estate, Tal-ankleshwar,,
Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
7. Arihant Inorganics Process (Pvt.) Plot No. 906/19, Nr. Ganeshanand Chowkdi,
Ltd. G.I.D.C., Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
8. Navkar Chemicals Plot No. 3010, Third Phase, G.I.D.C. Industrial
Estate, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
9. Jackson & Sons Plot No. 514, 515, 516, B/h, V-trans (i) Ltd.,
G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
10. Sun Chloride Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 603, G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli, Panoli -
11. Pragna Life Science Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 409/b/2, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
12. Visual Pharma Chem Plot No.: 2216/2217, G.I.D.C., Phase-3, Panoli -
13. Impro Interchem Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 414, G.I.D.C. Industrial Estate, Panoli -
394116, Gujarat, India.
14. Shivnath Industries Plot No.1815, I-phase, G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394116,
Gujarat, India.
15. Enzal Chemicals (i) Ltd. Plot No-2803/4, G.I.D.C. Estate, Bharuch
District, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
16. Dalmiya Chemicals Ltd Plot No.425, G.I.D.C., Panoli - 394116, Gujarat,
India.
17. Sai Vision Chem India Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 2912, G.I.D.C. Phase-3, Panoli -
18. Machhar Industries Limited Office No.614, G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394115, Gujarat,
India.

Sr. Name Of The Company Address

No.
19. Plus Chemicals Plot No. 220/a, Near J.b. Chemical, Water Tank,
G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394 116, Gujarat, India.
20. Solvay Specialities India Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 3526/27, G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli,
Bharuch, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
21. Rhodia Polymers & Specilist India Plot No-237, G.I.D.C. Estate, District Bharuch,
Pvt. Ltd. Panoli - 393002, Gujarat, India.
22. Trikaldarshi Chemical Industries Plot No.: 104, Road No.: 1, G.I.D.C. Panoli -
23. Gujarat Reclaim & Rubber Plot No.664, G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394116, Gujarat,
Products Ltd. India
24. Karunesh Remedies Plot No. 417/2, G.I.D.C. Panoli, Tal; Ankleshwar,
Dist: Bharuch, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India
25. Rahul Intermediates Plot No: 422, G.I.D.C., Panoli, near Dalmia
Chemical, Road No-4, Opp. Blueblend Syntex,
Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
26. Abs Industries Plot No: 408/10, Opp. Achechem Limited
G.I.D.C., Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
27. Gujarat Amines Plot No.:2107, G.I.D.C., Opp. Sanjali Railway
Station, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
28. Acmechem Limited Plot. 412-413, G.I.D.C. Estate, Dist. Bharuch,
Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
29. S. R. Chemicals Plot No. 1917 & C-1/1918, G.I.D.C., Dist.
Bharuch, Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
30. Sunwell Organics Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 602, G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli - 394116,
Gujarat, India.
31. Meghmani Organics Ltd. Plot No.21/21/1, G.I.D.C. Estate, Panoli -
32. R. P. Industries Plot No.314/315, G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394116,
Gujarat, India.
33. Ohm Dye Chem Plot No-517, G.I.D.C. Industrial Estate,, Panoli -
34. Rajchem Industries Plot No. 2915/2916, Phase-iii, Opp. Gujarat Agro
Chem, G.I.D.C. Panoli - 394116, Gujarat, India.
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited will be located in GIDC Estate, Panoli. The location aspects of
the site are provided in Table 1.4 in Chapter 1.
For Baseline Study, the monthly meteorological data for study period from March-2018 to
May-2018 is shown at below Table 3.2.

3.2 WINDROSE
Based on the meteorological data, wind rose have been prepared for the summer season
period between the March-2018 to May-2018. The wind rose diagram prepared from same
data is shown at Figure 3.1(A), Figure 3.1(B) Figure 3.2.
TABLE: 3.2
METEOROLOGICAL DATA
Month Temperature(oC) Humidity (%) Rain fall (mm)
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
March-2018 39 25 79 4 00 00
April-2018 40 26 76 3 00 00
May-2018 42 28 72 3 00 00
FIGURE: 3.1(A)
WIND ROSE DIAGARM FOR PERIOD OF MARCH-2018 TO MAY-2018

FIGURE: 3.1(B)
WIND ROSE DIAGARM

FIGURE: 3.2
WIND CLASS FREQUENCY DISRTIBUTION
It was observed that wind is blowing mainly towards the NE and East direction. Average wind
speed was 6.36 m/s with calm winds recorded to be 1.72%.

3.3. AIR ENVIRONMENT
3.3.1 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY (AAQ)
The basic objective of collection of base line data for air environment is to identify project
specific air pollutants being released into atmosphere, which will have significant impact on air
environment of immediate locality of the proposed project site. For assessment of the baseline
data it is important to specify the study area in respect of the location of the proposed project.
It was decided to the study ambient air quality at 8 locations in the different direction in
probable impact zone including the project site.
3.3.1.1 LOCATION OF AAQ MONITORING STATIONS
Ambient air quality stations were chosen considering the various factors like the most
prevailing wind direction, pockets of habitation, available infrastructure facilities like power
supply, accessibility etc. The location of AAQ monitoring stations are shown in Figure 3.3 and
Table 3.3.
FIGURE: 3.3
LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

TABLE: 3.3
DETAILS OF SAMPLING LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING
Sr. Location Distance & Latitude & Longitude District
No. Direction w.r.t
project site
1. Project Site (A1) -- Latitude - 21°32'29.60"N Bharuch
Longitude - 73° 0'3.20"E
2. Ankleshwar (A2) 8.40,N Latitude : 21°37'23.76"N Bharuch
Longitude : 73° 0'55.36"E
3. Panoli (A3) 5.26, WSW Latitude : 21°31'51.29"N Bharuch
Longitude : 72°57'48.94"E
4. Kapodara (A4) 5.20,NE Latitude - 21°35'42.45"N Bharuch
5. Kosamadi (A5) 5.37,NNE Latitude : 21°35'11.19"N Bharuch
6. Umarwada (A6) 6.02,NW Latitude - 21°34'49.02"N Bharuch
Longitude - 72°58'28.48"E
7. Boridara (A7) 6.06,E Latitude : 21°32'42.73"N Bharuch
8. Bharan (A8) 4.38, NW Latitude : 21°30'18.38"N Bharuch
Analysis methods:
The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out in accordance with National Ambient Air
Quality Standards (NAAQS) of CPCB. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) was carried out
at particular locations during the study period. Methods and Parameters are given in Table
No. 3.4.
TABLE: 3.4
LIST POLLUTANT & ANALYTICAL METHODS
Sr. Pollutant Analytical Methods

No.
1. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), µg/m3 IS: 5182 (Part-2)

2001 Reaffirmed: 2012
2. Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), µg/m3 IS: 5182 (Part-6)-
2006 , Reaffirmed -:
2017

3. Particulate Matter (size less

IS: 5182 (Part-23): 2006-Reaffirmed : 2017
than 10 µm) or PM10µg/m3
4. Particulate Matter (size less
than 2.5 microns) or PM2.5 CPCB Guidelines - NAAQMS-Volume-I: 2012
µg/m3
5. VOC µg/m3) VOC Meter
IS 5182 (Part-10): 1999

6. Carbon Monoxide (CO) mg/m3
Lab SOP
7. Ammonia (NH3)
µg/m3
IS 5182 (Part-19): 1982

8. Chlorine mg/m3
9. Bromine mg/m3 Lab SOP
3.3.1.2 BASE LINE DATA
The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out during period of March-2018 to May-2018.
Monitoring details like location, monitoring date are attached as ANNEXURE-VII. The
frequency of monitoring was twice in a week for a period of 12 weeks to assess the existing
the sub regional air quality status. All the sampling locations were monitored for PM 2.5, PM10,
SO2, NOx, VOC, CO, Cl2, HCl & Ammonia on 24 hrs basis to enable the comparison with
ambient air quality standards prescribed by the CPCB.
Based on the data obtained through ambient air quality survey statement showing maximum,
minimum average concentration values of different monitoring location in the study area have
been computed and presented at Table 3.5.

TABLE: 3.5
AMBIENT AIR QUALITY OF STUDY AREA
Locations Min. Value Max. Value Avg. Value
PM10 (Permissible Limit (CPCB standard) : 100 µg/m3)
A1-Project Site 65 86 80
A2-Ankleshwar 68 88 75
A3-Panoli 76 90 81
A4-Kapodara 72 83 78
A5-Kosamadi 77 90 82
A6-Umarwada 67 86 78.5
A7-Boridara 68 88 80
A8-Bharan 61 78 73.5
PM2.5 (Permissible Limit (CPCB standard) : 60 µg/m3)
A3-Panoli 34 43 39
A5-Kosamadi 32 42 38.5
A6-Umarwada 33 40 36
A8-Bharan 33 42 37
SO2 µg/m3(Permissible Limit (CPCB standard):80 µg/m3) (24 hr)
A2-Ankleshwar 24 35 28.5
A3-Panoli 25 36 29
A6-Umarwada 25 32 28.5
A8-Bharan 24 33 28
NOx µg/m3(Permissible Limit (CPCB standard):80 µg/m3) (24 hr)
A3-Panoli 39 44 41
A6-Umarwada 36 48 42
A8-Bharan 32 42 39
3
VOC in µg/m
A1-Project Site 2.3 3.9 3.2
A2-Ankleshwar 1.8 3.2 2.70
A3-Panoli 1.6 3.2 2.5
A4-Kapodara 2.7 3.9 3.2
A5-Kosamadi 2.8 3.7 3.18
A6-Umarwada 2.3 3.9 3.0

Locations Min. Value Max. Value Avg. Value

A7-Boridara 1.3 2.4 1.8
A8-Bharan 1.8 3.4 2.7
CO (Permissible Limit (CPCB Standard): 02 mg/m3)
A1-Project Site 0.2 0.6 0.5
A2-Ankleshwar 0.3 0.7 0.5
A3-Panoli 0.3 0.7 0.5
A4-Kapodara 0.2 0.5 0.3
A5-Kosamadi 0.4 0.7 0.5
A6-Umarwada 0.3 0.7 0.5
A7-Boridara 0.4 0.6 0.5
A8-Bharan 0.2 0.5 0.3
Cl2 in mg/m3
A1-Project Site BDL BDL BDL
A2-Ankleshwar BDL BDL BDL
A3-Panoli BDL BDL BDL
A4-Kapodara BDL BDL BDL
A5-Kosamadi BDL BDL BDL
A6-Umarwada BDL BDL BDL
A7-Boridara BDL BDL BDL
A8-Bharan BDL BDL BDL
HCl in mg/m3
A1-Project Site BDL BDL BDL
A2-Ankleshwar BDL BDL BDL
A3-Panoli BDL BDL BDL
A4-Kapodara BDL BDL BDL
A5-Kosamadi BDL BDL BDL
A6-Umarwada BDL BDL BDL
A7-Boridara BDL BDL BDL
A8-Bharan BDL BDL BDL
NH3 (Permissible Limit (CPCB Standard): 400 μg/m3)
A1-Project Site 7 9 8.2
A2-Ankleshwar 6 9 7.5
A3-Panoli 6 10 8.3
A4-Kapodara 5 8 7.2
A5-Kosamadi 4 6 3.9
A6-Umarwada 5 9 7
A7-Boridara 3 6 5
A8-Bharan 4 7 5.5

OBSERVATION:
Based on data obtained, it could be stated that, during the study period the values of PM10 at
monitored locations is ranged between 61-90 µg/m3 while the values PM2.5 fluctuates in the
range of 30-46 µg/m3. The values of SO2 and NOx were observed to be in the range of 22-40
µg/m3 and 32-48 µg/m3 respectively. The values of VOC were observed to be in the range of
1.3-3.9 µg/m3 respectively & the values of CO were observed to be in the range 0.2 - 0.7 mg/m3
The average concentration of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, VOC and CO are within prescribed limit
at all locations.
3.4 WATER ENVIRONMENT
There are two categories of water environment:

1) Ground water: - accumulation in deeper strata of ground and
2) Surface water: - river, drains, cannals, ponds etc.
Sampling Method
The samples were collected as per Indian standard IS: 3025 (part-1) for ground water and
surface water quality assessment.
Analysis Method
The analysis method followed for the measuring different parameters to evaluate water quality
is given in Table 3.6.
TABLE: 3.6
METHOD OF ANALYSIS
Sr. Parameters Applicable Standard Detection
No. Method of Analysis Limit
1. Color in Pt. Co. Sc. APH (22nd Edition) Spectrophotometer 1
(analogous to APHA 2120 C) (Platinum Cobalt
Method)
2. pH APHA(22nd Edition) 4500 H+ B Electrometric 0.01
Method
3. Total hardness APHA(22nd Edition) 2340 C: Page 2 – 37 EDTA 2
(as CaCO3) in mg/l Titrimetric Method
4. Chloride (as Cl) in APHA(22nd Edition) 4500-Cl-B-Argentometric 1
mg/l method
5. TDS in mg/l APHA (22nd Edition) 2540 C Total Dissolved Solid 4
Dried at 180˚C
6. TSS in mg/l APHA (22nd Edition) 2540-D-Total Suspended 4
Solids Dried at 103-1050C

7. Calcium (as Ca) in APHA (22nd Edition) 3500- Ca : B Page 3 – 65 2

mg/l EDTA Titrimetric Method
8. Magnesium (as Mg) APHA(22nd Edition) – 3500 - Mg : B Page 3 – 84 2
in mg/l Calculation Method
9. Sulphate (as SO4) APHA (22nd Edition) 4500–SO4-2 E: Page 4-188 1
in mg/l Turbid metric Method/ IS 3025 (Part 24) 1986
(Reaffirmed 1986) Gravimetric Method
10. Alkalinity (as APHA (22nd Edition) – 2320 B: Page 2 – 27 2
CaCO3) in mg/l Titration Method
11. COD in mg/l IS: 3025 (Part – 58) 2006 4
12. BOD in mg/l IS: 3025 (Part – 44) 1993 1

(Reaffirmed 1999)
13. MPN Coliform APHA -9221 C --
Count
14. E.coli APHA- 9221 D (Presence Absence Test) --
15. Nitrate in mg/l Spectrophotometer 1
16. Iron (as Fe) in mg/l By NOVA 60 spectrophotometer (Triazine) 0.01
17. Fluoride (as F) in By NOVA 60 spectrophotometer 0.1
mg/l
18. Residual Free Iodometric method 1
Chlorine in mg/l
19. Sodium in mg/l Flame photo meter --
20. Potassium in mg/l Flame photo meter --
21. Ammonical APHA-4500 N ORGBnC macro and semi-micro 2.8
Nitrogen in mg/l KJELDHAL
Eight locations were selected for ground water sampling and surface water sampling.
Collected samples were analyzed for drinking water quality parameters like physic-chemical
parameters and heavy metals. During study period, the sampling was done for one time. The
map viewing location for sampling points is shown at Figure 3.4 and Figure 3.5. The analysis
results are presented at Table 3.7 & 3.8.

FIGURE: 3.4
LOCATION OF GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS
TABLE: 3.7
DETAILS OF GROUND WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS
No. Direction
w.r.t project
site
1. Project Site -- Latitude - 21°32'29.60"N Bharuch
(GW1) Longitude - 73° 0'3.20"E
2. Ankleshwar 8.40,N Latitude : 21°37'23.76"N Bharuch
(GW2) Longitude : 73° 0'55.36"E
3. Panoli (GW3) 5.26, WSW Latitude : 21°31'51.29"N Bharuch
4. Kapodara(GW4) 5.20,NE Latitude - 21°35'42.45"N Bharuch
5. Kosamadi 5.37,NNE Latitude : 21°35'11.19"N Bharuch
(GW5) Longitude : 73° 1'54.24"E
6. Umarwada 6.02,NW Latitude - 21°34'49.02"N Bharuch
(GW6) Longitude - 72°58'28.48"E
7. Boridara(GW7) 6.06,E Latitude : 21°32'42.73"N Bharuch
8. Bharan (GW8) 4.38, NW Latitude : 21°30'18.38"N Bharuch

TABLE: 3.8
WATER QUALITY PARAMETERS (GROUND WATER SOURCES)
x Unit IS 10500 : 2012 Sampling Location
Desirabl Permissibl Project site Anklesh Panoli Kapoda Kosama Umarw Borida Bharan
e e (GIDC war (GW3) ra di ada ra (GW8)
Limit Limit Water) (GW2) (GW4) (GW5) (GW6) (GW7)
(GW1)
pH --- 6.5 – 8.5 6.5 –8.5 7.3 7.4 8.5 7.09 7.02 7.5 7.3 7.2
Color Hazen 5 15 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
TSS mg/L -- -- ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
TDS mg/L 500 2000 460 1552 1211 956 835 3260 1095 3850
Total mg/L 200 600 146 424 336 285 195 835 410 1420
Hardness
(as CaCO3)
Chloride mg/L 250 1000 70 625 230 136 114 198 112 310
(as Cl)
Calcium mg/L 75 200 105 160 92 103 162 451 215 520
(as Ca)
Magnesium mg/L 30 100 17 70 45 62 68 135 95 148
(as Mg)
Iron (as Fe) mg/L 0.3 1 0.25 0.34 0.01 0.28 0.32 0.02 0.01 0.02
Fluoride mg/L 1 1.5 0.70 0.45 0.01 0.35 0.68 0.1 0.02 0.02
(as F)
Sodium mg/L -- -- 120 490 224 356 148 634 302 231
(as Na)

x Unit IS 10500 : 2012 Sampling Location

Desirabl Permissibl Project site Anklesh Panoli Kapoda Kosama Umarw Borida Bharan
e e (GIDC war (GW3) ra di ada ra (GW8)
Limit Limit Water) (GW2) (GW4) (GW5) (GW6) (GW7)
(GW1)
Potassium mg/L -- -- 35 45 80 45 52 98 85 105
(as K)
Sulphate mg/L 200 400 24 65 165 178 42 326 119 395
(as SO4)
Nitrate mg/L 45 45 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Alkalinity mg/L 200 600 90 390 457 80 70 410 95 85

(as CaCO3)
COD mg/L 4 -- ND ND ND 18 ND 10 22 06
BOD mg/L 1 -- ND ND ND 5 ND ND 7 ND
Free mg/L -- -- ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Residual
Chlorine
E.coil MPN/1 Absent No Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
00 ml relaxation
Total MPN/ 1 10 ND ND <1.8 ND ND ND ND <1.8
coliform 100 ml
Bacteria
*ND-Not Detected
Detectable limit for Free Residual Chlorine- 1 mg/l

Observation: Quality of Ground Water

It was observed from the analysis report that:
• pH of the groundwater samples were recorded in the range of 7.02-8.5 as against the IS: 10500 drinking water standard of 6.5 to
8.5. pH of the water sample collected from the borewell within the project site (7.3) was found to be with in the specified
standards.
• Total hardness in the ground water samples recorded from 146 mg/l to 1420 mg/l.
• Chloride concentrations varied from 70 mg/l to 625 mg/l in the groundwater samples.
• Magnesium concentrations varied between 17 –148 mg/l. all the samples were found to be not exceeding the permissible limits
(100 mg/l).
• The level of total dissolved solids (TDS) recorded in the groundwater samples varied from 460 mg/l to 3850 mg/l.
• Fluoride levels in the groundwater samples were found to be in the range 0.01-0.70 mg/l. However, fluoride concentrations at all
location were found to be within the permissible limit (1.5 mg/l).
• Nitrate concentrations in all the samples were found to be within the acceptable limits (45 mg/l).
• E. coli concentrations were found to be absent for all the samples.
• Total coliform in the groundwater samples were found to be in the range of ND- <1.8 MPN/100 ml. All the samples were found to
be within the acceptable limits.
Analysis of collected samples reveals that rest of the parameters satisfy the permissible limits as per IS 10500:2012 specified for
drinking water and hence are suitable for drinking, however it is suggested that the water may disinfected by boiling or by use of
chlorine tablets before use.

FIGURE: 3.5
LOCATION OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS
TABLE: 3.9
DETAILS OF SURFACE WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS
No. Direction
w.r.t project
site
1. Umarwada (SW1) 6.02,NW Latitude - 21°34'49.02"N Bharuch
Longitude - 72°58'28.48"E
2. Ankleshwar (SW2) 8.40,N Latitude : 21°37'23.76"N Bharuch

3. Panoli (SW3) 5.26, NNE Latitude : 21°31'51.29"N Bharuch

4. Kharod (SW4) 1.14, NNE Latitude - 21°32'58.99"N Bharuch
5. Nana Borsana 2.81, SSW Latitude - 21°31'29.82"N Bharuch

(SW5) Longitude - 72°59'34.27"E
6. Kosamadi (SW6) 5.37,NE Latitude : 21°35'11.19"N Bharuch
7. Bakrol (SW7) 2.47, N Latitude -21°34'13.77"N Bharuch


8. Hathuran(SW8) 5.67, SSW Latitude – 21°30'3.87"N Bharuch
Longitude – 72°58'41.26"E
9. Boidar(SW9) 6.09,ENE Latitude – 21°32'47.04"N Bharuch
Longitude – 73° 3'32.27"E

Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat
for the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals with total 2425 MT/Month
TABLE: 3.10
WATER QUALITY PARAMETERS (SURFACE WATER SOURCES)
Parameter Unit IS 10500: 2012 Sampling Location

Desirable Permiss Umarwa Ankleshw Panoli Kharod Nana Kosam Bakr Hathur Boidar
Limit ible da ar (SW2) (SW3) (SW4) Borsan adi ol an (SW9)
Limit (SW1) a (SW6) (SW7 (SW8)
(SW5) )
pH --- 6.5 -8.5 6.5-8.5 8.1 7.05 7.7 7.8 8 7.9 7.1 8.0 7.8
Colour Pt.co.s 5 15 <1 <5 <1 <1 <1 <5 <1 <1 <1
c
Odour --- Unobjectio -- Unobjecti Unobjectio Unobje Unobjectio Unobje Unobje Unobj Unobje Unobje
nable onable nable ctionabl nable ctionabl ctionabl ection ctionabl ctionabl
e e e able e e
Turbidity NTU 3 5 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2
DO mg/L -- -- 5.4 6.7 3.4 5.7 6.2 5.0 4.5 4.8 5.6
Total mg/L 200 600 290 122 235 454 168 220 162 165 420
hardness
(as CaCO3)
Chloride mg/L 250 1000 221 48 193 235 65 130 42 175 215
(as Cl)
TDS mg/L 500 2000 1012 1050 779 1090 525 640 575 810 610
Calcium mg/L 75 200 163 53 160 212 94 140 82 105 192
(as Ca)
Magnesium mg/L 30 100 102 69 94 236 64 80 89 76 105
(as Mg)

Iron mg/L 0.3 1 0.23 0.002 0.1 0.15 0.02 0.005 0.02 0.2 0.10
Fluoride mg/L 1 1.5 0.02 0.24 0.2 0.03 0.03 0.38 0.02 0.1 0.02
Sodium mg/L -- -- 88 39 142 202 44 110 36 120 135

(as Na)
Potassium mg/L -- -- 64 94 39 85 42 65 46 89 84
(as K)
Sulphate mg/L 200 400 48 16 52 46 102 25 232 72 45
(as SO4)
Nitrate mg/L 45 45 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Alkalinity mg/L 200 600 420 335 360 380 400 390 340 410 385
(as CaCO3)
COD mg/L -- -- 08 13 24 3 4 10 12 5 4
BOD mg/L -- -- ND 4 14 ND ND ND ND ND ND
E.Coil MPN/ -- -- Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absen Absent Absent
100 ml t
Total MPN/ -- -- <1.8 Absent <1.8 <1.8 <1.8 Absent <1.8 <1.8 <1.8
coliform 100 ml
Bacteria
ND-Not Detected
Observation: Quality of Surface Water

 pH of the surface water samples varied between 7.05-8.1.

 Highest TDS value was obtained for the sample collected from Kharod. (1090 mg/l).
 Total hardness in the surface water samples recorded from 122 mg/l to 454 mg/l, whereas all location is within the permissible limit of
600 mg/l.
 Chloride concentrations varied from 42 mg/l to 221 mg/l in all location had chloride concentrations within the acceptable limit (250 mg/l)
except kharod location. Samples collected from kharod were found to be exceeding the permissible limit (1000 mg/l).
 Magnesium concentrations varied between 64 – 236 mg/l, Samples collected from kharod & Umarwada were found to be exceeding the
permissible limit (100 mg/l).
 The level of total dissolved solids (TDS) recorded in the surface water samples varied from 525 mg/l to 1090 mg/l. In samples collected
from all location in the TDS levels were found to be exceeding the acceptable limit of 500 mg/l.
 Biochemical Oxygen demand (BOD) of the samples varied between ND to 14 mg/l. highest BOD value was obtained for the sample
collected from panoli.
 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of the samples varied between 3 to 24 mg/l. highest COD value was obtained for the sample
collected from panoli.
 E. coli concentrations were found to be absent for all the samples.
 Total coliform in the groundwater samples were found to be in the range of ND- <1.8 MPN/100 ml. All the samples were found to be
within the acceptable limits.
In summary, surface water from the village ponds is used for bathing, irrigation and catching fish. The surface water quality reveals that the
water conforms to CPCB Class “B “(Outdoor bathing organized) and Class “D” (Propagation of wildlife and fisheries) water quality criteria.

3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise can be defined as an unwanted sound. It interferes with speech and hearing. If intense
enough, it can damage hearing, or is otherwise irritating. Noise can also disturb natural wildlife
and ecological system.
3.5.1 RECONNAISSANCE
In order to measure the existing noise sources and to identify the background noise levels, the
noise pollution survey around the proposed site was carried out.
3.5.2 METHODOLOGY FOR NOISE MONITORING

Noise standards have been designated as per the Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules,
2000 Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. The
ambient noise standards are presented in Equivalent noise levels (Leq). The measurements were
carried out at each monitoring location during day time and night time. Noise survey was
conducted using Sound Level Meter.
3.5.3 NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

A total of eight locations were identified for ambient noise monitoring in the study area. The
noise monitoring locations are shown in Figure 3.6 and listed in Table 3.11.

FIGURE: 3.6
LOCATION OF NOISE MONITORING STATIONS
TABLE: 3.11
NOISE MONITORING STATION RESULTS
Sr. Location Distance Latitude & Area LEQ (DB (A)
No. in Km & Longitude Category
Direction
Day Night
time time
1 Project Site -- Latitude - 21°32'29.60"N Industrial 44-55 39-46
(N1) Longitude - 73° 0'3.20"E
2 Ankleshwar 8.40,N Latitude : 21°37'23.76"N Residential 53-60 48-52
(N2) Longitude : 73° 0'55.36"E
3 Panoli (N3) 5.26, Latitude : 21°31'51.29"N Residential 50-55 42-50
WSW Longitude : 72°57'48.94"E
4 Kapodara 5.20,NE Latitude - 21°35'42.45"N Residential 47-53 35-47
(N4) Longitude - 73° 0'45.17"E
5 Kosamadi 5.37,NN Latitude : 21°35'11.19"N Residential 50-55 43-50
(N5) E Longitude : 73° 1'54.24"E
6 Umarwada 6.02,NW Latitude - 21°34'49.02"N Residential 54-60 45-51
(N6) Longitude - 72°58'28.48"E
7 Boridara (N7) 6.06,E Latitude : 21°32'42.73"N Residential 50-55 43-50
8 Bharan (N8) 4.38, Latitude : 21°30'18.38"N Residential 52-60 44-52
NW Longitude : 72°58'27.03"E

TABLE: 3.12
CPCB RECOMMENDATIONS FOR COMMUNITY NOISE EXPOSURE
Area Code Category of area Leq. (dBA) Leq. (dBA)
(Daytime) (Night time)
(06:00 to 21:00hrs.) (21:00 to 06:00hrs.)
A Industrial area 75 70
B Commercial Area 65 55
C Residential Area 55 45
D Silence Zone 50 40
Note : 1 Silence zone is defined as areas up to 10 meters around such premises as hospitals,
education, institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by the Component
Authority.
Note : 2 Mixed categories of areas should be declared as one of the four above-mentioned
categories by the Component Authority and the corresponding standard has apply.
(Source: The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000)
OBSERVATION & DISCUSSION

The noise levels during daytime varied from 45-55 dB (A) Leq to 55-62 dB (A) Leq in the study
area. The noise level in the study area is within the permissible Limits as per Noise rules 2000.
The night time noise level in the study area is in the range of 35-47 dB (A) Leq to 45-55 dB (A)
Leq. The night time noise was also within stipulated standards of CPCB.

3.6 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

3.6.1 BASELINE DATA
Description of soil environment has become vital particularly when the treated effluent is to be
discharge on land for disposal or treatment. The soil environment is usually described by
determining the physical and chemical characteristics of soil samples collected from site with
the help of auger/spade. The composite soil sample was collected from project site and the
villages Within 10 km radius. The samples were collected to determine physical and chemical
characteristic of soil. The selected soil sampling locations are given in Table 3.13 and shown in
Figure 3.7.
TABLE: 3.13
SOIL QUALITY MONITORING WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT SITE
Sr. Locations Distance in Type of District
No Km Area
.
1. Project Site -- Latitude 21°32'29.60"N Industrial Bharuch
(S1) Longitude : 73° 0'3.20"E
2. Ankleshwar 8.40,N Latitude : 21°37'23.76"N Residential Bharuch
(S2) Longitude : 73° 0'55.36"E
3. Panoli (S3) 2.35,SW Latitude -21°31'52.06"N Residential Bharuch
Longitude -72°57'55.27"E
4. Nana 2.81, SSW Latitude - 21°31'29.82"N Residential Bharuch
Borsana Longitude - 72°59'34.27"E
(S4)
5. Kosamdi 5.37,NNE Latitude : 21°35'11.19"N Residential Bharuch
(S5) Longitude : 73° 1'54.24"E
6. Umarwada 2.37,NNW Latitude - 21°34'49.88"N Residential Bharuch
(S6) Longitude -72°58'22.12"E
7. Bharan (S7) 4.38, NW Latitude : 21°30'18.38"N Residential Bharuch
8. Bhadi (S8) 4.44 (ESE) Latitude - 21°33'8.39"N Residential Bharuch

FIGURE: 3.7
LOCATION OF SOIL MONITORING STATIONS
TABLE: 3.14
SOIL QUALITY PARAMETERS
Parameter Sampling Location
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
pH
7.8 7.4 7.9 7.93 7.8 7.2 7.5 7.78
(5% slurry)
2.5
1.42 2.3 1.22 1.25 1.36 2.60 1.28
Specific Gravity 1
Porosity (%) 18 46 18 20 22 38.4 44 24
1.3
1.28 1.37 1.22 1.42 1.44 1.34 1.41
Conductivity (µmS/cm) 3
Water Holding Capacity
42 38 45 32 38 33 36 40
(90% by wt. of Soil (%)
Grain Size Distribution (%)
Clay 48
9.9 40 8.3 12 56 56 23
(< 0.002 mm)
30.2 23 18.8 11 30 22 25 14.2
Slit (0.075-0.002 mm)
58.9 16 33.2 80.7 58 22 19 62.8
Sand (4.75- 0.075mm )
Phosphate 0.0006 0.008 0.0055 0.0179 0.0085 0.003 0.0 0.01

Parameter Sampling Location

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
(gm/kg ) 06 75
0.6 0.14
0.192 0.68 0.890 0.13 0.699 0.22
Calcium (gm/kg) 9 2
0.1 0.25
0.215 0.25 0.149 0.299 0.245 0.2
Magnesium (gm/kg) 2 1
Zinc (gm/kg) 0.033 ND 0.252 0.0063 0.024 0.020 ND ND
0.0
0.04 0.002 0.030 0.023 0.025 0.04 ND
Nickel (gm/kg) 16
0.3 0.22
0.255 0.30 0.360 0.263 0.344 0.376
Sodium (gm/kg) 5 2
Potassium (meq/100gm) 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.2 1.5 1.2 1.4
Nitrgen 12.
12.0 12.3 12.1 12.5 12.0 12.2 12.3
(meq/100gm) 2
Phosphorus 14.
14.5 14.9 14.6 15.0 14.5 14.7 14.6
(meq/100gm) 5
% 6.2
5.3 12.4 6.21 4.7 12.32 4.8 6.36
Moisture Content 1
3.7 LAND USE PATTERNS
The land use pattern of the study area has been studied by satellite imaginary picture of
National Remote Sensing Centre, Govt. of India. Details are covered in Table 3.15.
TABLE: 3.15
AREAS UNDER DIFFERENT LAND USE
Sr. Land Use Classification Area within 10 km of Percentage of Total
No Project Location Area
.
1. Agriculture Land 18464 58.77
2. Barren Land 5492 17.48
3. Surface water body 1370 4.36
4. Settlements 2783 8.85
5. Industries 3306 10.54
Total 31415 hector 100.00
(Courtesy: Environmental Information Center, New Delhi

FIGURE: 3.8
LAND COVER MAP WITH VILLAGE LOCATION

3.8 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT & SOCIO –ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
3.8.1 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
The study of the environmental components like flora and fauna is required to assess the
biological diversity of the region. Flora and fauna can be used for biological surveillance in
assessing the environmental status. The ecological interpretation of study area is based on
secondary sources of information.
Water is the basic and essential resource for the survival of flora and fauna. The flora being the
primary producer influences the fauna of the region. The characteristic flora existing in a region
depends upon the existing conditions such as intensity of sunlight, type of soil, quality of air,
including the quality and quantity of water available, etc.
The topography of Bharuch district is plain with numerous small watersheds and water logged
areas resulting from agriculture wasteland, fallow land and pastures collecting rainwater or
backwater and becoming marshy /saline. The waterlogged areas are dominated by
hydrophytes. The coast is silty to clayed silt substratum with some sandy part. The areas near
the seashore are mostly affected by tides and remain submerged for considerable time.
3.8.2 FOREST
Bharuch area is characterized by tropical dry deciduous forests. The total forest area of district
is 1449. 68 sq. km. That accounts for 0.73 % of the total geographical area of the district. The
study area does not have any identified endangered species and also does not have any
designated forest, national park, sanctuaries.
(Source: Forest Department, Government of Gujarat).
3.8.3 FLORA
The list of flora is taken from forest department.
Flora is covered in entire Bharuch district.
List of flora & fauna is given in Table 3.16 & 3.17.
3.8.4 F AUNA
Fauna is covered in entire Bharuch district.
List of fauna is given in Table 3.17.
(Courtesy: State forest Dept., Bharuch, Gujarat)

TABLE: 3.16 & 3.17

LIST OF FLORA & FAUNA
FLORA FAUNA
Amphi
Major
Shrubs Herbs Mammal(s) Reptile(s) Bird(s) Insecticides bian(s
Tree
)
Nanu Dolan Madhiyo baj Common Bhumi

Bangali Darudi Fatakiya,
vaniyar kachindo Emigrant dedko
Babool Bhony gali
(Patangiu)
Nilgai Bodi Samadi Crimson tip dar
Aniar Sudufuli Betha fatakia
bamani (Patangiu) dedko
Jungali Pidapetva Shakro Small grass Kar
Khair Mundar Fatakia
bhund di ghar Yellow kabro
gharodi (Patangiu) bhumig
at
dedko
Kachindo Tetar Common -
Pandhar Rui Gadab, Rajko Chhachhun
castor
a Khair dar
(Patangiu)
Patla gho Moti lavri Kansari
Babul Karvand Gypti, Sasalu
Sarpankho
Vandro Sampno Mor Popto
Siris Multaifou Kapurio
kano
m
Jungali Bhamphod Dhor Tid
Siris Spinosa
biladi i baghalo
Rekii
Jarakh - Safed Charmariyu
Garad Ghaneri Ajagandha
kakansar
Andhadi Kadi Vando
Hed Nivdang Bhangro Nolio
chakaran kakansar
Sahudi Ajgar Titodi Udhai
Bela Wavding Ganthiyu,
Gha rujamni
Panch Kankoya Kapasi Chusiyu
Maharuk Rantulro Bho pathri
pattavadi
h
khiskoli
Undardo Dendu Bater Gigo
Ankol Atali Gorakh
mundi
Undar Tamrpithvr Hariyal Machhar
Siris Tet Moti sedrd,
uksh
umaro Sahadevi
samp
Rupsundar Kabutar Chusiyu
Dhavda Dhotara Kapuri Undardi
i
Madhuri
Vagol Samanya Holo Phul makhi
Sitafal Nirgudi Aghedo
varundati
Chamachidi Dhamano Taliyo holo Makhi
Nim Tarota Dhhimdo
ya or
Sipa
-- Kadotaro Fudi
Kacham Beri Kanejro
ar
-- Nag Koyal Patangiu
Semal Thor Katalo
dhimado
-- -- Khadchitro Huko Patangiu
Asta Bhonya Amli
(Kathmo
hli)
-- -- Paid Chibari Bhamaro
Asan Nagala
Dudheli
-- -- Andhadi Kalkaliyo Madhmakhi
Charoli Bhoi aamli
chakaran
-- -- Ajgar Patrango Nani madhmakhi
Palas Kupi, Vichhi
Kanta
-- -- Kankoya Chashh Makodo
Bottlebru Moti bhoi
sh aamli
-- Bhint chati -- Dendu Kansaro Kidi
Sura
-- -- Tamrpithvr Jimol
Kumbh Jinku
uksh Lakkadkhod
utangan
samp
-- -- Rupsundar Kabro Karodio
Manjo Kari agheri
i lakkadkhod
-- -- Samanya Sudo or Karodio
Dedak Khadsalio
varundati Popat
manio
-- -- Dhamano Rajpipadan Karodio
Sunari
Utangan o popat
-- -- Kadotaro Tui Karodio
Ralkirani
Adbau bala
-- Bala -- Nag Chatak Karodio
Ganeri
-- -- -- Khadchitro Tarodiyu Vichhi
Nariyal
-- -- -- Paid Pidak Kanpichhudo/
Gundi
Kankhajuro
-- -- -- -- Kadiyo Adasiyu
Dhobin
koshi
-- -- -- -- Kabar --
Sisso
-- -- -- -- Bulbul --
Karlilimb
-- -- -- -- lelu --
Kara

-- -- -- -- Van Lailu --
Kukeri
-- -- -- -- Laila --
Gulmoha
r
-- -- -- -- Chatki --
Tendu
makhimar
-- -- -- -- Kherkhatto --
Mallar
sing
-- -- -- -- Kagado --
Alinar
-- -- -- -- Harit nil --
Safeda
maakhimaar
-- -- -- -- Dayyad --
Aonla
-- -- -- -- Dev Chakali --
Pungara
-- -- -- -- Nachan --
Almi
-- -- -- -- Dudharaj --
Pipal
-- -- -- -- Darjido --
Pilari
-- -- -- -- Rakhodi --
Bara
ramchakali
-- -- -- -- Vann --
Rankdi
divadighodo
-- -- -- -- Divadighod --
Kakad
o
-- -- -- -- Sugari --
Dhaman
-- -- -- -- Lal tapusiyu --
Aniar
-- -- -- -- Phul --
Valva
Sunghani
-- -- -- -- Chakli --
Bhindi
-- -- -- -- -- --
Nano
-- -- -- -- -- --
Sidha
-- -- -- -- -- --
Champa
-- -- -- -- -- --
Modad
-- -- -- -- -- --
Mahua
-- -- -- -- -- --
Amm
-- -- -- -- -- --
Gulambh
-- -- -- -- -- --
Indian
Coral
tree
-- -- -- -- -- --
Kalam
-- -- -- -- -- --
Champa
-- -- -- -- -- --
shevga
-- -- -- -- -- --
Kela
-- -- -- -- -- --
Tetu
-- -- -- -- -- --
Shindi
-- -- -- -- -- --
Babul
-- -- -- -- -- --
Babul
-- -- -- -- -- --
Chisbala
i
-- -- -- -- -- --
Karanja
-- -- -- -- -- --
Guava
-- -- -- -- -- --
Bija
-- -- -- -- -- --
Anar
-- -- -- -- -- --
Aritha
-- -- -- -- -- --
Rohan
-- -- -- -- -- --
Ashok
-- -- -- -- -- --
Ashok
-- -- -- -- -- --
Pilakant
on
-- -- -- -- -- --
Kodaya
-- -- -- -- -- --
Jamun
-- -- -- -- -- --
Salad
-- -- -- -- -- --
Behada
-- -- -- -- -- --
Arjun
-- -- -- -- -- --
Jangli
badam
-- -- -- -- -- --
Tentuli
-- -- -- -- -- --
Nellow
bell
-- -- -- -- -- --
Sag
-- -- -- -- -- --
Gol
-- -- -- -- -- --
kudo

-- -- -- -- -- --
Ghatbor
-- -- -- -- -- --
Bordi
WATER BODIES- YES/NO
Type Stat Major Fish Small Fish Amphibians/ Butterflies

us
River/Pond/ Mollusks
Wet/
Canal/ Dry/
Name Sea
Khadi/others son
al/P
eren
nial
Sample No
Taken
Photogr Yes /No (Photo no.

aphs __________)
Major
Tree
Algae
Fungi
Aquatic
Plants
Herbs
Indirect Sighting and Secondary Information
Micro-
habitat
Debarki
ng sign
Feather
s
Nesting
Pug Marks/Scat/Foot
Prints/Claws/Dung/etc.

Information from Local villagers
Any Other information
(Courtesy: State forest Dept., Bharuch, Gujarat)
3.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
As assessment of socio-economic environment forms an integral part of an EIA study, baseline

information for the same was collected during the study period. The baseline socio-economic
data collected for the study region, before the proposed expansion is operational, has been
identified for the four major indicators viz. demography ,civic amenities, economy and social
culture. The baseline status of the above indicators is compiled in forthcoming sections.
3.9.1 DEMOGRAPHIC DATA WITHIN THE REGION OF INTEREST
Demography covers the information related to population density sex ratio and literacy level of
the public in the study area. Table 3.20 provides the data on inhabitations of the Ankleshwar
Taluka.
On an average, Taluka Ankleshwar has population density of about 228 persons per sq.km.
(2011 Census data), compared to the Bharuch District, which has a population density of about
295 persons per sq.km. (2011 Census data).
TABLE: 3.18
DEMOGRAPHIC DATA
Sr. Village name Taluka Total Total Total Total
No population male female population
<6 years
1 Panoli Ankleshwar 5462 2817 2645 800
2 Kharod Ankleshwar 4658 2623 2035 537
3 Bakrol Ankleshwar 1591 851 740 199
4 Bhadi Ankleshwar 2831 1381 1450 444
5 Umarwada Ankleshwar 3711 1847 1837 476
6 Amrutpura Ankleshwar 943 502 441 125
7 Avadar Ankleshwar 1333 707 626 152
8 Dadhal Ankleshwar 3695 1838 1857 540
9 Jitali Ankleshwar 4225 2160 2065 523
10 Kararvel Ankleshwar 1526 785 741 199
11 Mandvabuzarg Ankleshwar 5938 2995 2943 646
12 Motali Ankleshwar 895 459 436 153
13 Naugama Ankleshwar 920 502 418 101
14 Pardi Mokha Ankleshwar 586 292 294 63

<6 years
15 Piprod Ankleshwar 607 298 309 97
16 Samor Ankleshwar 1294 670 624 152
17 Sangpor Ankleshwar 2670 1369 1301 286
18 Sarangpore Ankleshwar 16671 9373 7298 2666
19 Uchhali Ankleshwar 895 451 444 117
20 Andharkachhala Jhagadia 293 156 137 45
21 Boridara Jhagadia 960 495 465 94
22 Borjai Jhagadia 1519 787 732 199
23 Bhojpur Jhagadia 698 369 329 89
24 Dadheda Jhagadia 1094 559 535 135
25 Dholakuva Jhagadia 310 158 152 45
26 Damalai Jhagadia 563 298 267 77
27 Fulwadi Jhagadia 1783 916 867 202
28 Govali Jhagadia 4381 2297 2084 444
29 Haripara Jhagadia 816 433 383 70
30 Jhagadia Jhagadia 5446 2779 2667 550
31 Kapalsadi Jhagadia 2024 1038 986 208
32 Kharchi Jhagadia 1068 575 493 108
33 Kharchi Bhilwada Jhagadia 998 501 497 158
34 Kharia Jhagadia 531 277 254 74
35 Kunvarpara Jhagadia 200 99 101 31
36 Karad Jhagadia 727 368 359 94
37 Limet Jhagadia 1739 893 846 215
38 Malpor (Dumala) Jhagadia 906 466 440 121
39 Moran Jhagadia 866 437 429 106
40 Mota Sanja Jhagadia 1053 526 527 84
41 Mulad Jhagadia 1043 529 514 119
42 Nana Sanja Jhagadia 1644 852 792 188
43 Navagam Mota Jhagadia 520 261 259 71
44 Padal Jhagadia 1743 880 863 209
45 Panvadi Jhagadia 592 307 285 71
46 Rajpore Jhagadia 339 165 174 44
47 Randedi Jhagadia 447 230 217 63
48 Ranipara Jhagadia 2225 1125 1100 266
49 Ratanpor Jhagadia 2130 1093 1037 262
50 Sardarpura Jhagadia 456 247 209 38
51 Selod Jhagadia 1653 836 817 179
52 Sultanpura Jhagadia 5864 3003 2861 570
53 Shiyali Jhagadia 1069 559 510 135
54 Talodara Jhagadia 2057 1026 1031 250

<6 years
55 Uchedia Jhagadia 2438 1249 1189 250
56 Untia Jhagadia 752 378 374 92
57 Vanthevad Jhagadia 661 349 312 82
58 Vasna Jhagadia 1522 778 744 223
59 Vaghpara Jhagadia 274 133 141 37
60 Bhilod Valia 3476 1745 1731 389
61 Dholgam Valia 2556 1311 1245 303
62 Hirapor Valia 1963 1019 944 272
63 Kondh Valia 4562 2372 2190 544
64 Valia Valia 7678 3829 3849 769
(Source: Census-2011 for Bharuch District)
TABLE -3.19
POPULATION DENSITY & SEX RATIO
Population Sex ratio
Sr. Population
Name Density (No. of females per
No (Persons)
(Person/Sq.km.) 1000 males)
1 Within 10 km radius 117837 375 928
(2011)
2 Taluka Jhagadia 185337 228 949
(2011)
3 Taluka Ankleshwar 315596 725 882
(2011)
4 Taluka Valia 145400 283 962
(2011)
5 District Bharuch 1551019 295 925
(2011)
3.9.2 LITERACY RATE
The literacy rate is a major factor, which influences the socio-cultural condition of a particular
place. Details of literacy rate in percentage in district Bharuch and Taluka Jhagadia are given in
Table 3.20.
TABLE- 3.20
LITERACY RATE
Sr. No. Name Literacy rate (%)
1 Within 10 km radius 78.13%
2 Taluka Ankleshwar (2011) 75.62 %
3 District Bharuch(2011) 72.09 %

TABLE: 3.21
LITERACY RATE WITHIN 10 KM RADIAL DISTANCE OF STUDY AREA
Sr. Village name City/block Total Population Population Literacy (%)
No. name population < 06 Literate
years
1 Panoli Ankleshwar 5462 800 3458 75.95
2 Kharod Ankleshwar 4658 537 3749 90.01
3 Bakrol Ankleshwar 1591 199 1183 84.8
4 Bhadi Ankleshwar 2831 444 1805 77.4
5 Umarwada Ankleshwar 3711 476 2516 78.6
6 Amrutpura Ankleshwar 943 125 619 75.67
7 Avadar Ankleshwar 1333 152 963 81.54
8 Dadhal Ankleshwar 3695 540 2708 85.83
9 Jitali Ankleshwar 4225 523 2897 78.25
10 Kararvel Ankleshwar 1526 199 1039 78.29
11 Mandvabuzarg Ankleshwar 5938 646 4089 77.26
12 Motali Ankleshwar 895 153 545 73.45
13 Naugama Ankleshwar 920 101 656 80.09
14 Pardi Mokha Ankleshwar 586 63 467 89.29
15 Piprod Ankleshwar 607 97 360 70.58
16 Samor Ankleshwar 1294 152 699 61.20
17 Sangpor Ankleshwar 2670 286 1783 74.79
18 Sarangpore Ankleshwar 16671 2666 11430 81.61
19 Uchhali Ankleshwar 895 117 597 76.73
20 Andharkachhala Jhagadia 293 45 139 56.04
21 Boridara Jhagadia 960 94 696 80.37
22 Borjai Jhagadia 1519 199 1072 81.21
23 Bhojpur Jhagadia 698 89 482 79.14
24 Dadheda Jhagadia 1094 135 642 66.94
25 Dholakuva Jhagadia 310 45 208 78.49
26 Damalai Jhagadia 563 80 314 65.01
27 Fulwadi Jhagadia 1783 202 1141 72.17
28 Govali Jhagadia 4381 444 2917 74.09
29 Haripara Jhagadia 816 70 530 71.04
30 Jhagadia Jhagadia 5446 550 4081 83.35
31 Kapalsadi Jhagadia 2024 208 1572 86.56
32 Kharchi Jhagadia 1068 108 859 89.47
33 Kharchi Jhagadia 998 158 640 76.19
Bhilwada
34 Kharia Jhagadia 531 74 278 60.83
35 Kunvarpara Jhagadia 200 31 119 70.41
36 Karad Jhagadia 727 94 471 74.40
37 Limet Jhagadia 1739 215 1149 75.39

Sr. Village name City/block Total Population Population Literacy (%)

No. name population < 06 Literate
years
38 Malpor Jhagadia 906 121 487 62.03
(Dumala)
39 Moran Jhagadia 866 106 603 79.34
40 Mota Sanja Jhagadia 1053 84 731 75.43
41 Mulad Jhagadia 1043 119 758 82.03
42 Nana Sanja Jhagadia 1644 188 1152 79.12
43 Navagam Mota Jhagadia 520 71 273 60.8
44 Padal Jhagadia 1743 209 1066 69.49
45 Panvadi Jhagadia 592 71 417 80.03
46 Rajpore Jhagadia 339 44 164 55.59
47 Randedi Jhagadia 447 63 256 66.66
48 Ranipara Jhagadia 2225 266 1284 65.54
49 Ratanpor Jhagadia 2130 262 1177 63
50 Sardarpura Jhagadia 456 38 384 91.86
51 Selod Jhagadia 1653 179 1150 78.09
52 Sultanpura Jhagadia 5864 570 4506 85.11
53 Shiyali Jhagadia 1069 135 634 67.88
54 Talodara Jhagadia 2057 250 1415 78.3
55 Uchedia Jhagadia 2438 250 1601 73.17
56 Untia Jhagadia 752 92 512 77.57
57 Vanthevad Jhagadia 661 82 429 74.09
58 Vasna Jhagadia 1522 223 959 73.82
59 Vaghpara Jhagadia 274 37 183 77.21
60 Bhilod Valia 3476 389 2392 77.48
61 Dholgam Valia 2556 303 1595 70.79
62 Hirapor Valia 1963 272 1321 78.11
63 Kondh Valia 4562 544 3208 79.84
64 Valia Valia 7678 769 6004 86.9
3.9.3 OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE
In economic development of the region its geographical location, natural resources, business
and employment, industries and manpower play vital role. Table 3.22 provides the occupational
patterns in all villages of Ankleshwar Taluka.

TABLE-3.22
OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE
Sr. Village Cd block Total Total Total main Total marginal Total non Employment
No. name Name population Work Worker Worker Worker ratio%
Population Population Population population
1 Panoli Ankleshwar 5462 1897 1667 230 3565 34.73

2 Kharod Ankleshwar 4658 1290 1236 54 3368 27.69
3 Bakrol Ankleshwar 1591 782 554 228 809 49.15
4 Bhadi Ankleshwar 2831 898 868 30 1933 31.72
5 Umarwada Ankleshwar 3711 1429 1389 40 2282 38.50
6 Amrutpura Ankleshwar 943 388 252 136 555 41.14
7 Avadar Ankleshwar 1333 607 361 246 726 45.53
8 Dadhal Ankleshwar 3695 1301 1152 149 2394 35.21
9 Jitali Ankleshwar 4225 1610 1384 226 2615 38.1
10 Kararvel Ankleshwar 1526 544 403 141 982 35.64
11 Mandvabuza Ankleshwar 5938 2258 2086 172 3680 38.02
rg
12 Motali Ankleshwar 895 385 347 38 510 43.01
13 Naugama Ankleshwar 920 412 361 51 508 44.78
14 Pardi Mokha Ankleshwar 586 199 191 8 387 33.95
15 Piprod Ankleshwar 607 264 251 13 343 43.49

16 Samor Ankleshwar 1294 617 587 30 677 47.68
17 Sangpor Ankleshwar 2670 1186 1147 39 1484 44.41
18 Sarangpore Ankleshwar 16671 5905 5587 318 10766 35.42
19 Uchhali Ankleshwar 895 324 297 27 571 36.2
20 Andharkach Jhagadia 293 140 81 59 153 47.78

hala
21 Boridara Jhagadia 960 411 377 34 549 42.81
22 Borjai Jhagadia 1519 478 466 12 1041 31.46
23 Bhojpur Jhagadia 698 398 397 1 300 57.02
24 Dadheda Jhagadia 1094 331 282 49 763 30.25
25 Dholakuva Jhagadia 310 185 124 61 125 59.67
26 Damalai Jhagadia 563 340 95 245 223 60.39
27 Fulwadi Jhagadia 1783 748 535 213 1035 41.95
28 Govali Jhagadia 4381 1857 1774 83 2524 42.38
29 Haripara Jhagadia 816 515 219 296 301 63.11
30 Jhagadia Jhagadia 5446 2164 2003 161 3282 39.73
31 Kapalsadi Jhagadia 2024 787 654 133 1237 38.88
32 Kharchi Jhagadia 1068 538 397 141 530 50.37
33 Kharchi Jhagadia 998 382 239 143 616 38.27
Bhilwada
34 Kharia Jhagadia 531 214 210 4 317 40.3
35 Kunvarpara Jhagadia 200 72 66 6 128 36
36 Karad Jhagadia 727 354 333 21 373 48.69
37 Limet Jhagadia 1739 683 679 4 1056 39.27
38 Malpor Jhagadia 906 579 566 13 327 63.90
(Dumala)
39 Moran Jhagadia 866 381 327 54 485 43.99
40 Mota Sanja Jhagadia 1053 498 483 15 555 47.29
41 Mulad Jhagadia 1043 437 393 44 606 41.89
42 Nana Sanja Jhagadia 1644 755 506 249 889 45.92
43 Navagam Jhagadia 520 160 160 0 360 30.76

Mota
44 Padal Jhagadia 1743 664 442 222 1079 38.09
45 Panvadi Jhagadia 592 363 356 7 229 61.31
46 Rajpore Jhagadia 339 134 133 1 205 39.52
47 Randedi Jhagadia 447 145 110 35 302 32.43
48 Ranipara Jhagadia 2225 1030 1005 25 1195 46.29
49 Ratanpor Jhagadia 2130 743 545 198 1387 34.88
50 Sardarpura Jhagadia 456 202 106 96 254 44.29
51 Selod Jhagadia 1653 626 550 76 1027 37.87
52 Sultanpura Jhagadia 5864 2025 1844 181 3839 34.53
53 Shiyali Jhagadia 1069 403 344 59 666 37.69
54 Talodara Jhagadia 2057 715 579 136 1342 34.75
55 Uchedia Jhagadia 2438 1057 931 126 1381 43.35
56 Untia Jhagadia 752 506 402 104 246 67.28
57 Vanthevad Jhagadia 661 253 235 18 408 38.27
58 Vasna Jhagadia 1522 605 581 24 917 39.75
59 Vaghpara Jhagadia 274 79 78 1 195 28.83
60 Bhilod Valia 3476 1312 1127 185 2164 37.74
61 Dholgam Valia 2556 900 499 401 1656 35.21
62 Hirapor Valia 1963 869 743 126 1094 44.26
63 Kondh Valia 4562 1783 1563 220 2779 39.08
64 Valia Valia 7678 2976 2558 418 4702 38.76

Main worker is a worker who has worked last year for six month or more. Marginal worker is a worker who has worked last year for less
than six months. Non-worker is worker who did not work at all during the reference period of one year.
Distribution of main worker and marginal worker into further following four categories are shown in Table 3.23.
I) Cultivators II) Agricultural labors III) Household industry IV) others workers
TABLE- 3.23
DISTRIBUTION OF WORKERS
Sr. Main worker population Marginal worker population

Village name
No. Cultivator Agriculture House Hold Other Cultivator Agriculture Household Other
1 Panoli 214 533 76 844 12 70 26 117
2 Kharod 222 423 3 588 20 6 0 28
3 Bakrol 81 81 16 376 12 149 5 62
4 Bhadi 181 321 2 364 4 11 0 15
5 Umarwada 162 795 0 432 5 22 0 13
6 Amrutpura 38 147 2 65 32 87 2 15
7 Avadar 82 33 5 241 6 235 0 5
8 Dadhal 137 385 39 591 8 63 9 69
9 Jitali 126 642 34 582 11 192 2 21
10 Kararvel 70 117 2 214 21 49 1 70
11 Mandvabuzarg 272 1264 29 521 13 130 4 25
12 Motali 67 187 1 92 8 25 0 5
13 Naugama 45 197 0 119 1 45 0 5
14 Pardi Mokha 35 68 0 88 1 4 0 3
15 Piprod 21 147 0 83 2 7 0 4

Village name
16 Samor 52 437 2 96 2 20 0 8
17 Sangpor 161 755 16 215 2 28 1 8
18 Sarangpore 67 443 108 4969 11 25 15 267
19 Uchhali 49 178 0 70 3 20 0 4
20 Andharkachhala 18 58 1 4 3 55 0 1
21 Boridara 141 143 10 83 5 11 0 18
22 Borjai 95 238 41 92 1 8 1 2
23 Bhojpur 13 378 0 6 1 0 0 0
24 Dadheda 88 153 4 37 4 42 0 3
25 Dholakuva 46 73 0 5 1 60 0 0
26 Damalai 45 14 8 28 1 243 0 1
27 Fulwadi 77 128 4 326 14 144 1 54
28 Govali 309 1038 14 413 17 42 0 24
29 Haripara 54 108 20 37 19 201 28 48
30 Jhagadia 209 506 25 1263 6 32 15 108
31 Kapalsadi 138 351 8 157 20 82 0 31
32 Kharchi 89 116 1 191 20 85 3 33
33 Kharchi Bhilwada 60 65 2 112 6 84 0 53
34 Kharia 14 145 0 51 0 3 1 0
35 Kunvarpara 2 64 0 0 1 5 0 0
36 Karad 40 190 10 93 1 4 4 12
37 Limet 93 518 3 65 1 0 1 2
38 Malpor (Dumala) 3 535 0 28 1 11 0 1
39 Moran 33 287 0 7 1 53 0 0
40 Mota Sanja 48 312 0 123 0 3 1 11


Village name
41 Mulad 76 213 7 97 12 24 2 6
42 Nana Sanja 77 256 2 171 43 54 4 148
43 Navagam Mota 4 154 0 2 0 0 0 0
44 Padal 63 292 0 87 22 170 2 28
45 Panvadi 28 231 1 96 0 6 0 1
46 Rajpore 25 78 0 30 0 1 0 0
47 Randedi 14 67 0 29 1 22 0 12
48 Ranipara 140 777 1 87 9 3 2 11
49 Ratanpor 11 296 0 238 35 155 0 8
50 Sardarpura 28 12 1 65 5 78 3 10
51 Selod 129 347 14 60 14 49 2 11
52 Sultanpura 108 404 181 1151 16 26 2 137
53 Shiyali 65 265 0 14 0 48 0 11
54 Talodara 108 292 11 168 19 93 4 20
55 Uchedia 177 523 23 208 1 108 4 13
56 Untia 97 124 2 179 44 49 0 11
57 Vanthevad 9 173 3 50 0 13 2 3
58 Vasna 117 381 0 83 1 21 0 2
59 Vaghpara 3 70 0 5 1 0 0 0
60 Bhilod 221 562 19 325 10 143 9 23
61 Dholgam 96 280 2 121 16 277 1 107
62 Hirapor 56 469 0 218 6 82 0 38
63 Kondh 102 551 12 898 18 112 2 88
64 Valia 122 459 35 1942 30 60 16 312
(Source: Census-2011for Bharuch District)

3.10 TRAFFIC SURVEY

3.10.1 RECONNAISSANCE
The traffic survey, to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was conducted on the road
near the project site. The composition of Traffic includes Two Wheelers, Three Wheelers
(Goods & Passenger Autos, Four Wheeler (Passenger Cars) and Four Wheeler Heavy Vehicles
like Trucks, Lorries, Busses etc.
3.10.2 TRAFFIC SURVEY OF THE STUDY AREA
Data were collected by physically counting the number of vehicles playing in both directions of
NH-8: Delhi to Mumbai Highway. The hourly counts were carried out for the different type/
category of vehicles. The variation in the traffic flow at the given road along with the numbers of
vehicles during peak hour & lean hour is presented in the table below. While it’s graphical
representation is done in figure below.
TABLE: 3.24
DELHI TO MUMBAI HIGHWAY (NH-8)
Sr. Vehicle Type During Lean No. of During Peak No. of Vehicles In
No. Hrs. Vehicles In Hrs (No. of PCU During Peak
(No. of PCU During Vehicles/Hr) Hrs
Vehicles/Hr) Lean Hrs
1. Two Wheelers 46 23 76 57
2. Three Wheelers 26 32 37 74
3. Cars 303 607 321 642
4. Buses/ Mini Buses 211 778 242 528
5. Trucks/ 202 741 248 910
Lorries
6. 2 Axle Truck 235 865 261 966
7. 3 Axle Truck 225 830 258 955
3.10.3 EXISTING TRAFFIC SCENARIO AND LEVEL OF SERVICES (UP)
 The road from Delhi to Mumbai is six lanes with divider.

 Capacity of road as per IRC= 2500 PUC’s/ hr
 Total volume during peak hours= 1443 Nos.
 Existing volume / capacity ratio= 1443/2500=0.5772
 The level of service is “C” that is good

TABLE: 3.25
LEVEL OF SERVICE
Sr. No. Existing volume/ Capacity Ratio Levels of Services

1. 0.0 to 0.2 “A” (Excellent)
2. 0.2 to 0.4 “B” (Very Good)
3. 0.4 to 0.6 “C” (Good)
4. 0.6 to 0.8 “D” (fair)
5. 0.8 to 1.0 “E” (Poor)
Location: From B to A (Down): From Mumbai to Delhi
TABLE: 3.26
MUMBAI TO DELHI HIGHWAY (NH-8)
Sr. Vehicle Type During No. of During Peak No. of Vehicles
No. Lean Hrs. Vehicles In Hrs (No. of In PCU During
(No. of PCU During Vehicles/Hr) Peak Hrs
Vehicles/Hr) Lean Hrs
1. Two Wheelers 42 31 79 90
2. Three Wheelers 30 32 35 68
3. Cars 276 552 320 637
4. Buses/ Mini 201 742 246 908
Buses
5. Trucks/ Lorries 190 699 209 770
6. 2 Axle Truck 215 792 253 932
7. 3 Axle Truck 214 788 242 892
3.10.4 EXISTING TRAFFIC SCENARIO AND LEVEL OF SERVICES (DOWN)

 Capacity of road as per IRC= 2500 PUC’s/ hr
 Total volume during peak hours= 1384
 Existing volume / capacity ratio= 1384/2500=0.55
 The level of service is “C” that is good
Results:
The above traffic reveals the LOS (Levels of Service) as “C” Good for the NH-8 Road, Which
are 4 lane roads divider for proposed project scenario. Since adequate parking is provided and
increased in nominal traffic due to proposed project has taken care by the four lane road.

CHAPTER 4
IDENTIFICATION & ASSESSMENT OF IMPACT

Table of Contents
4. IDENTIFICATION & ASSESSMENT OF IMPACT
4.1 Identification Of Impact 123
4.2 Prediction And Assessment Of Impact 130
4.2.1 Water Environment 130
4.2.1.1 Construction Phase Impacts 130
4.2.1.2 Operational Phase Impacts 130
4.2.2 Air Environment 130
4.2.2.2 Operation Phase Impacts 131
4.2.3 Noise Environment 142
4.2.4 Land Environment 142
4.2.4.1.1 Land Use 142
4.2.4.1.2 Topography, Geology And Soils 142
4.2.4.1.3 Population Displacement And Rehabilitation 143
4.2.4.1.4 Land Pollution 143
4.2.5 Ecological Environment 145
4.2.6 Infrastructure And Services 146
4.2.6.1 Construction Phase Impacts & Operation Phase Impacts 146
4.2.7 Socio-Economic Impact 146
4.2.7.1.1 Population 146
4.2.7.1.2 Employment 146
4.2.7.1.3 Transportation 146
4.2.7.2 Operation Phase Impacts 147
4.2.7.2.1 Population 147
4.2.7.2.2 Employment 147
4.2.7.2.3 Transportation 147
4.2.7.2.8 Impact Due To Fire Accident 147
4.2.7.2.5 Impact On Public Health 147
4.2.7.2.6 Accident Hazard And Safety 148
4.3 Impact Matrix 148
4.4 Cleaner Production 151
4.4.1 Pollution Prevention-Cleaner Production 151
4.4.2 Water Conservation-Cleaner Production 151
4.4.3 Energy Conservation-Cleaner Production 152
4.4.4 Reuse / Recycle-Cleaner Production 152
4.4.5 Good Housekeeping-Cleaner Production 152
1
Table of Tables
Table 4.1 Flue Gas Emission Details 131

Table 4.2 Process Gas Emission Details 132
Table 4.3 Concentration Of PM 133
Table 4.4 Concentration Of SO2 & NO2 133
Table 4.5 Concentration of NH3 134
Table 4.6 Concentration of HCl 134
Table 4.7 Concentration Of Cl2 135
Table 4.8 Environment Impact Matrix (With Mitigation Measures) 149
Table 4.9 Cumulative Impact Chart 150
Table of Figures
Figure 4.1 Impact Network On Air Environment 124

Figure 4.2 Impact Network On Noise Environment 125
Figure 4.3 Impact Network On Water Environment 126
Figure 4.4 Impact Network On Ground Water 127
Environment
Figure 4.5 Impact Network On Socio-And Cultural Environment 128
Figure 4.6 Impact Network On Land Environment 129
Figure 4.7 Isopleths Of PM (Site Coordinates 0, 0) 136
Figure 4.8 Isopleths Of SO2 (Site Coordinates 0, 0) 137
Figure 4.9 Isopleths OF NOx (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0) 138
Figure 4.10 Isopleths OF HCl (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0) 139
Figure 4.11 Isopleths OF Cl2 (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0) 140
Figure 4.12 Isopleths OF NH3 (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0) 141
total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER-4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENT IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEAUSRES
4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACT
This chapter deals with the assessment of project impacts on environment. Mitigative measures are
suggested to minimize the likely negative impacts.
The network method (Cause - effect) was adopted to identify potential impact of the proposed activity.
It includes step wise study of relationship between an activity and its environmental parameters. This
method involves in the “Road Map” type of approach to the identification of second and third order effect.
The basic idea is to account for the project activity and identify the type of impact that could initially
occur followed by the identification of secondary and tertiary impact.
The project will have impacts of varying magnitude on different environmental components. These
impacts could be categorized as-
 Primary impacts, i.e. impacts which occur as a direct result of the project activities.
 Secondary and tertiary impacts, i.e. impacts that occur as a result of primary impacts.
The type of identified potential impacts on various environmental components i.e. Air, Noise, Water and
Land are presented in figure 4.1 to figure 4.6.

FIGURE 4.1
IMPACT NETWORK ON AIR ENVIROENMENT

FIGURE 4.2
IMPACT NETWORK ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT

FIGURE 4.3
IMPACT NETWORK ON WATER ENVIRONMEN

FIGURE 4.4
IMPACT NETWORK ON GROUND WATER ENVIRONMENT

FIGURE 4.5
IMPACT NETWORK ON SOCIO-AND CULTURAL ENVIRONMENT

FIGURE 4.6
IMPACT NETWORK ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2 PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT OF IMPACT
The predication and assessment of impact on the environmental parameters have been carried out. For
assessing the impact, the baseline data of environmental status were considered. The change in the
environmental parameters due to manufacturing activities of the industry has been superimposed on
the status data.
4.2.1 WATER ENVIRONMENT
4.2.1.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS
During construction phase, water will be required for construction of structures, sprinkling for dust
suppression. The raw water for the various purposes will be supplied by GIDC.
There will no impact on surrounding ground water quality and quantity during construction phase.
4.2.1.2 OPERATIONAL PHASE IMPACTS
Total water requirement of the unit after proposed expansion will be 2710 KL/Day. The unit will use 2460
KLD fresh water and 250 KLD recycled water.
Total effluent generation will be 1585 KLD. The effluent will undergo from primary, secondary and tertiary
treatment and subject to M/s. NCTL.
4.2.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT
Dust will be generated during excavation and hauling operation and vehicle transportation on unpaved
tracks at the site. Other exhaust gases like NOx, SO2 and VOC may be also slightly released into the
local ambient air due to vehicular traffic movement. Thus, the local ambient air quality may be
temporarily affected. It will be confined within the project boundary and expected to be negligible outside
the plant boundaries.
Mitigative Measures
Water sprinkling and provision of enclosures will allow the particles to settle down prior to discharge.
There will be provision of enclosures to construction area to allow the particles to settle down prior to
discharge. The load carrying vehicle will be covered by clean impervious layer to ensure the dusty
material do not leak from vehicle. Proper maintenance of vehicles and construction equipment will help
in controlling the gaseous emissions.

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2.2.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS

The project will result flue gas emission, process emission and fugitive emission. Flue gas emission will
be from stacks Boiler, TFH and DG sets. Process emission will be from Spin Flash Dryer and Reactors.
There will be fugitive emission of VOC and acid mist during material handling, transferring and at storage
area.
Mitigative Measure
Boiler & TFH will be based on Coal. The unit will attach adequate APCM to curb the flue gas emission.
The unit will also provide water scrubbers followed by alkali scrubbers to curb the process gas
emissions.
Modelling Details
The dispersion of pollutants in the atmosphere is a function of several meteorological parameters like
temperature, wind speed and direction, mixing depths, inversion level etc. The air quality impacts of
source or collection of sources is evaluated by use of models. The model stimulates the relationship
between air pollutants emission, meteorology and air chemistry, all of which are determined by
formulating impact scenario. Estimation of emissions from the plant has been made by Industrial Source
Complex – Short Term (ISC-ST3) model developed by United States Environment Protection Agency
(USEPA). ISC-ST is based on a modified steady state Gaussian Plume equation, and it has been
recommended for use in EIA studies by Ministry of Environment & Forests and Climate change (MoEF&
CC) in EIA manual.
TABLE 4.1
FLUE GAS EMISSION
Sources of gaseous Boiler-2 Thermic Thermic Boiler-1 no. Thermic
emissions nos. Fluid Fluid (10 TPH) Fluid
(5 TPH Heater-1 & Heater-3 & Heater-
Boiler-1
each) 2 4 (2 Nos)
no. (8 TPH)
(20 lakhs (20 Lakhs (20 lakhs
Kcal/hr.) Kcal/hr.) Kcal/hr.
each)
Fuel used Coal Coal Coal Coal Coal Coal
Quantity of fuel 36 MT/Day 20 MT/Day 20 MT/Day 50 MT/Day 80 MT/Day 20 MT/Day

Type of emissions SO2, NOX, SO2, NOX, SO2, NOX, SO2, NOX, SO2, NOX, SO2, NOX,
PM PM PM PM PM PM

total 2425 MT/Month
Stack height 40 30 30 30 30
(meter)
Stack diameter at
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
the top (meter)
Stack gas exit
1500C 1500C 1500C 500C 500C 500C
temperature (oK)
Stack gas exit
7 7 7 7 7 7
velocity (m/s)
Emissions:
PM Concentration < 120 < 120 < 120 < 120 < 120 < 120
mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
SO2 Concentration < 80 ppm < 80 ppm < 80 ppm < 80 ppm < 80 ppm < 80 ppm
NOx Concentration < 40 ppm < 40 ppm < 40 ppm < 40 ppm < 40 ppm < 40 ppm
TABLE 4.2
PROCESS GAS EMMISSION DETAILS
Sources of Reactors Spin Reactor of CPC Spin Flash
Reactor of
gaseous of CPC Flash Blue Plant Dryer (3
CPC Green-7 Drowning
emissions Blue Dryer (4Nos.) Nos.)
[Glass Lined Vessels
Plant (4 (4 Nos of
reaction (4Nos.)
Nos of SFD)
vessels no. 6]
reactor)
Type of emissions Ammonia SPM Ammonia HCl, Cl2 HCl SPM
Stack height 20 15 20 15
15 15
(meter)
Stack diameter at 0.3 0.3 0.3
0.3 0.3 0.3
the top (meter)
Stack gas exit 500C
500C 500C 500C 500C 500C
temperature (oK)
Stack gas exit 6 6 6
6 6 6
velocity (m/s)
Emissions:
NH3 Concentration < 140 -- < 140 mg/Nm3 --
-- --
mg/Nm3
PM Concentration < 120 < 120
-- -- -- --
mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
NOx --
-- -- -- -- --
Concentration
HCl Concentration -- -- -- < 16 mg/ Nm3 < 16 mg/Nm3 --
-- -- --
Cl2 Concentration -- -- < 07 mg/ Nm3

total 2425 MT/Month
TABLE 4.3
CONCENTRATION OF PM
Highest Incremental increase in X Co-ord (mts) Y Co-ord
Values Concentration (µg/m3) (mts)
PM
1 2.948 1000 0
2 2.643 1000 0
3 2.339 1000 1000
4 2.184 1000 0
5 2.074 1000 0
6 2.028 0 1000
7 1.811 1000 0
8 1.81 1000 1000
9 1.79 0 1000
10 1.774 1000 1000
TABLE 4.4
CONCENTRATION OF SO2 and NO2
Incremental increase in
Highest Concentration (µg/m3) X Co-ord Y Co-ord
Values (mts) (mts)
NO2 SO2
1 1.599 2.791 1000 0

2 1.284 2.241 1000 0
3 1.272 2.221 1000 1000
4 1.145 2 1000 0
5 1.113 1.943 1000 0
6 1.101 1.923 0 1000
7 0.988 1.724 1000 1000
8 0.966 1.687 1000 1000
9 0.927 1.619 0 1000
10 0.905 1.58 1000 0

total 2425 MT/Month
TABLE 4.5
CONCENTRATION OF NH3
Highest Incremental increase in X Co-ord Y Co-ord
Values Concentration (µg/m3) (mts) (mts)
NH3
1 0.572 1000 0
2 0.487 1000 0
3 0.474 1000 0
4 0.401 1000 0
5 0.394 0 1000
6 0.389 1000 1000
7 0.381 -1000 1000
8 0.377 1000 1000
9 0.353 1000 0
10 0.335 0 1000
TABLE 4.6
CONCENTRATION OF HCl
Highest Incremental increase X Co-ord Y Co-ord
Values in Concentration (mts) (mts)
(µg/m3)
HCl
1 0.717 1000 0
2 0.626 1000 0
3 0.536 1000 0
4 0.498 0 1000
5 0.478 1000 1000
6 0.473 -1000 1000
7 0.461 0 -1000
8 0.458 1000 0
9 0.434 0 -1000
10 0.428 0 -1000

total 2425 MT/Month
TABLE 4.7
CONCENTRATION OF Cl2
Highest Incremental increase X Co-ord Y Co-ord
Values in Concentration (mts) (mts)
(µg/m3)
Cl2
1 0.0143 1000 0
2 0.0125 1000 0
3 0.0104 1000 0
4 0.0103 0 1000
5 0.0099 0 -1000
6 0.0098 -1000 1000
7 0.0093 0 -1000
8 0.0093 1000 1000
9 0.0092 0 -1000
10 0.009 1000 0

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.7
ISOPLETHS OF PM (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0)

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.8
ISOPLETHS OF SO2 (SITE COORDINATES 0, 0)

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.9
ISOPLETHS OF NOx (SITE COORDINATES 0,0)

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.10
ISOPLETHS OF HCl (SITE COORDINATES 0,0)

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.11
ISOPLETHS OF Cl2 (SITE COORDINATES 0,0)

total 2425 MT/Month
FIGURE 4.12
ISOPLETHS OF NH3 (SITE COORDINATES 0,0)
OBSERVATIONS FROM DISPERSION MODELING STUDIES:

From the dispersion modeling studies conducted, it was observed that the maximum ground level
concentration occurs in the East direction. The maximum incremental increase in concentration for NO 2,
SO2 & PM is 1.599 µg/m3, 2.791 µg/m3 and 2.948 µg/m3 at a distance of about 1 km in the East direction.
Whereas the incremental increase in the NH3, HCl and Cl2 concentration was found to be 0.572 µg/m3
, 0.717 µg/m3 and 0.0413 µg/m3 at a distance of about 1 km in the East direction.

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT
Noise will be generated during the intermittent operation of machineries for site clearing and construction
work. Vehicular movement will be also a source of noise generation. There will be short term, localized
and reversible impact on ambient noise levels during the construction activities.
Mitigative Measures
 Operation of construction equipment’s generating higher noise will be strictly restricted during
10 p.m. to 6 a.m.
 The construction machinery and equipment will be well maintained. Provision of enclose, damper
and other engineering control will control noise pollution.
 Workers operating this equipment will be given ear plugs/muffs.
The sources of noise pollution will be boiler and other noise generating units. Vehicular movements
during operation phase for loading/unloading of raw materials and finished products and other
transportation activity may also increase noise level.
Mitigative Measures
 Adequate noise control measures such as mufflers, silencers at the air inlet/outlet, anti-vibration
pad for equipment with high vibration etc. shall be provided.
 Housing/casing shall be provided for all noise generating machines.
 Job rotation will reduce exposure to some extent. Moreover, PPE like earmuff and ear plugs will
be provided to the operators/worker exposed to high noise.
 The proposed green belt will further be helpful in reducing the ambient noise level.
4.2.4 LAND ENVIRONMENT
4.2.4.1.1 LAND USE
 The proposed facility is spread over an area of approximately 99002 sq. m. Panoli, Gujarat.
4.2.4.1.2 TOPOGRAPHY, GEOLOGY AND SOILS
 As the project site is fairly flat terrain without any rock, there will be no blasting. As the site is
uneven, some levelling work will be required.

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2.4.1.3 POPULATION DISPLACEMENT AND REHABILITATION

 There is no issue of resettlement and relocation as the project is in GIDC Estate, Panoli.
4.2.4.1.4 LAND POLLUTION
 Land pollution can be caused due to improper disposal of hazardous wastes on the land
environment and spillage or leakage of chemicals.
Mitigative Measures
 The hazardous solid waste generated during construction activity will be stored and disposed
properly. The storage will be properly constructed with impervious layer with R.C.C. with proper
flooring.
 Sewage generated from sanitation facility will be disposed through high efficient and compact
sewage treatment plant. The treated wastewater will used for gardening.
 Hence, there will be no significant adverse impact on land environment due to handling of
hazardous solids waste.
If the hazardous wastes are not handled properly, it can pose danger of land contamination and
can affect land system adversely. Transportation is one of the most important areas of concern
associated with handling Hazardous Waste, Because the packaging and method of transporting
of Hazardous waste will prevent the likelihood that an accident or spill would occur.
Mitigative Measures
 Transportation of hazardous waste to the TSDF Site will be governed as per the guidelines.
 Separate collection system will be provided for collection of spillage material. Impervious layer,
RCC roads and flooring will be provided to area, where the chemical and hazardous waste
storage and handling activities will be involved.
 Separate storm water collection system will be provided to prevent contamination of soil through
contaminated water.
 The unit will follow the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for storing and handling of
hazardous wastes.

total 2425 MT/Month
 The proposed green belt area will improve the aesthetic environment of the area.No significant
impact on land environment has been envisaged during the operation phase as the hazardous
waste generated will be either recycled or disposed off as per norms.
 The unit will follow Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for storing and handling of hazardous
wastes.
Standard Operating Procedure
1. All the departments will collect the various types of the waste and segregate it in various types
like paper and packing material, plastic bags, process waste, metal waste glass waste etc.
2. After collecting the waste, respective departments will fill up the slip along with format number
for disposal
3. The person will shift the various type of waste in the designated areas of the waste category.
Before shifting it person will inform and hand over the filled slip to ETP Operator/ Chemist/ EHS
– HOD.
4. On sufficient stock of the waste type, it will be disposed off.
5. Spent/used oil will be given to MoEF registered repressor.
6. For disposal of discarded bags and containers, the guideline provided by the Gujarat Pollution
Control Board will be followed. It will be ensured that containers are empty before taken for
disposal. As per the guidelines all the containers will be washed properly, the washings will be
checked for pH and COD. The pH should be neutral and COD should be NIL. This will ensure
that the containers are cleaned before taken for disposal. Removal or defacing of all labelling
and content of all product and waste material will be regular practice. The sticker will be put on
individual container as "cleaned". The container will be deposited in the area marked for disposal.
Then the containers will be inspected by the certifying agency approved by the GPCB. In
confirmation of the quality of the cleaning they will issue the stickers for identification. After
receiving the stickers that should be pasted on to the containers. Then the containers are
disposed off to actual raw material supplier.
Care To Be Taken During Handling of Waste
1. Person handling the hazardous waste should wear gloves, shoes/ gum boots etc. mask like
Personal Protective Equipment.
2. If spillage occurred swipe it and collect it in to the bag and mix it with the waste.

total 2425 MT/Month
3. Forklift will be used in shifting, loading and unloading operation for hazardous waste to minimize
manual handling of hazardous waste.
4.2.5 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT
The impact due to the proposed expansion on ecological parameters like natural vegetation,
cropping pattern, fishers and aquatic life, forest land species diversity are briefly summarized
below:
The project site is located within the GIDC Panoli. The project site is devoid of trees; it will not damage
any important flora. There will be no impact on natural vegetation during construction. Since, the project
is established on a non-agriculture land, it will not to alter the crop production of the area. The project
site is at a far distance from the forest land, wild life sanctuaries and national parks. Hence, no adverse
impact on this account is anticipated.
The study area does not have any type of forest and endangered fauna within 10 km area. However, all
the environmental and related issues have been properly addressed with its impacts and Mitigative
measures in the proposed project. There will not be any major impact on the terrestrial ecology of the
project site due to proposed project.
Mitigative Measures
 The green belt will be developed by unit having different species of flora, which will lead to
beneficial impact on ecological environment.
 There will be necessary environmental protection measures which have been planned under
EMP i.e. air pollution control system designed to take care of release of the gaseous pollutants
like PM, SO2, NOx, VOC.
 The waste water generation from process will be treated in Primary ETP and then effluent will
be sent to M/s. NCTL.
 Raw material and hazardous waste will be transported by road and will be stored in plant
premises.
 The project proponent shall consider all the safety measures in planning, designing and
operation of the plant as per standard practices.
 Hence, no adverse impact on this account is anticipated.

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2.6 INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES

4.2.6.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS & OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS
The plant is located in a GIDC Estate, Panoli, Ta:-Ankleshwar, Dis :- Bharuch, and Gujarat having all
essential facilities such as water, power, post and telecommunication. There is a well laid down broad
roads already existing in GIDC Estate. The transportation facilities will also expect to improve due to
increase in the movement of workers and raw material and finished products. This will have almost
negligible impact on road network. Power requirement of proposed project will be 14820 HP and will be
met from DGVCL.
The infrastructure services e.g. roads, post and telegraph, communication, medical facilities, education;
housing will be improved in surrounding area.
4.2.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT
4.2.7.1.1 POPULATION
 During the peak construction phase, construction manpower including construction workers will
be employed.
 However, to the maximum extent possible, construction workers will be employed from within
the study area.
 Since the construction phase of this project will be for short time period, the socio-economic
impact due to construction of this project is going to be temporary.
 Considering the above-mentioned factors, the construction phase of the project will have minor
impact on population in the study area.
4.2. 7.1.2 EMPLOYMENT
 Around 20-25 workers will be employed in the construction work. This will increase construction
employment in the study area although temporality. Hence, the proposed project will have minor
impact on employment in construction phase.
4.2.7.1.3 TRANSPORTATION
 For transportation of construction material, the existing road infrastructure is adequate.
 Moreover, as the construction phase for the proposed project will be few months, the impact
would be temporary.

total 2425 MT/Month
4.2.7.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS
4.2.7.2.1 POPULATION
In the operational phase, about 30 workers will be employed for the proposed project. This
number of employee is very small compared to the total population of the study area. Also as a
social impact mitigation measure, unit will endeavour to employ most of these people from within
the study area at worker level, subject to availability of suitable manpower in the area. So the
proposed project in its operational stage is not expected to directly affect the total number or
composition of population in the study area significantly. However the population of the study
area is expected to increase marginally due to migration of persons from outside of the study
area.
4.2.7.2.2 EMPLOYMENT
All efforts will be made to employ local people as far as possible. Local people will be given first
preference based on technical skill and knowledge. In addition, employment will be generated
by the secondary supporting activities e.g. transportation, communication, boarding, daily utility
services.
4.2.7.2.3 TRANSPORTATION
Because of the good network of transportation facilities in the study area, the additional truck
traffic generated during the operational phase is not expected to bring any considerable load to
the existing transportation system.
4.2.7.2.4 IMPACT DUE TO FIRE ACCIDENT

Project design and development has been planned with care and all provisions have been made
for the safety and security of the property as well as the person.
4.2.7.2.5 IMPACT ON PUBLIC HEALTH

The discharge of waste materials (gaseous emission and solid wastes) from the project can have
some adverse impact on public health in the surrounding area, if appropriate treatment

total 2425 MT/Month
procedures are not followed. The unit is committed to provide efficient and productive Treatment
(Effluent, gaseous emission and solid wastes) to ensure there are very negligible impacts on
Public Health.
4.2.7.2.6 ACCIDENT HAZARD AND SAFETY
During operational phase accident / hazards will be greatly minimized and ensure further safety
of the local people. In addition, by adopting mitigation measures it will ensure high safety
standards.
Mitigative Measure
 Provision of adequate APCM and maintains of APCM will prevent any accidental emission from
stacks and reduce risk to the health of the people in the vicinity of the project.
 All safety measures will be carried out to prevent any accident. The unit will have onsite /offsite
emergency plan
4.3 IMPACT MATRIX
The parameter discussed are presented in the form of a matrix in Table 4.4.There will be both
construction and operation phases.
The quantification of impact is done using numerical scores 0 to 5 as per the following criteria.
Score Severity criteria
0 No Impact
1 No damage
2 Slight/short term effect
3 Occasional reversible effect
4 Irreversible /Long –term effect
5 Permanent Damage

TABLE 4.8
Phase Activities during Air Water Noise Land Infra- Ecological Health safety & Socio-
the quality quality & quality Structure environmen Aesthetics Economic
Phase Odour /Services t Status
Constr
uction
Excavation, civil work, transportation of

phase
construction vehicle 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
Water requirement 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
Material Storage/handling/
Transport 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 0
Effluent discharge
0 2 0 0 2 1 0 0
(considering discharge to GIDC Drainage)
Utilities 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Operation phase
Gaseous emissions 2 0 1 1 0 1 2 0
Fugitive emissions 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0
Solid/hazardous Waste
Disposal 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 0
Spills & Leaks 2 1 0 1 1 1 2 0
Plant Operations 2 2 1 0 1 1 2 1
Equipment Failures/ Shutdown/
Startup 2 2 1 0 2 1 2 1
Transport of workers/Movement
of vehicles 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Cumulative score 18 12 10 08 15 12 18 04

total 2425 MT/Month
TABLE 4.9
CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART
Environmental Total Cumulative
Parameter
Air Quality 18
Water Quality 12
Noise and Odor 10
Land Quality 08
Infrastructure/ Service 15
Ecological environment 12
Socio Economic Status 18
Health safety & Aesthetics 04
Conclusion:
The source of water will be GIDC water; there will be no extraction of ground water. Entire effluent will
be treated in primary effluent treatment plant. Then Effluent will be send to the M/s. NCTL for further
treatment.
Effluent will be subjected to M/s. NCTL. Even though after provision of APCM, there will be minor
increase in ground level concentration of SO2, NOx, PM, in ambient air due to construction and
operational activities of proposed project.
Construction activities will disturb soil profile but impact will be insignificant. The unit will take adequate
measure for storage, handling and disposal hazardous waste. Hence, there will be no significant
adverse impact on land environment.
Engineering control, use of PPE, restriction of construction activity during 10 p.m. to 6 a.m., and green
belt will reduce impact of noise pollution due to construction work, vehicular movement and noise
generating equipment. There will be minor increase in ambient noise level and impact will be
insignificant.
The project site is at a far distance from the forest land, wild life sanctuaries and national parks. There
will be not significant impact on crops & vegetation as the proposed APCM will take care of flue gas
emission and process emission.This will be a beneficial impact on the local socio-economic environment
as increase in demand for essential utilities and employment during both construction and operational

total 2425 MT/Month
phase. This will be a beneficial impact on the local infrastructure services e.g. roads, post and telegraph,
communication, medical facilities, education, housing will be improved in surrounding area.
4.4 CLEANER PRODUCTION
 Cleaner Production in recent times has emerged as an attractive proposition to tackle the
environmental problems posed by rapid industrialization and is being accepted worldwide. Besides
reducing pollution, it also improves the process efficiency, thus reducing the cost of production.
 Applications of CP mainly focus on preventing or minimizing the generation of waste and gaseous
emission. The basic idea of cleaner production is to avoid a problem altogether rather than trying to
find remedial measure by adopting proactive approach of waste management. As far as the
production processes are concern, CP is achieved by raw material and energy conservation, by
reducing quantum of emission and waste generation. To obtain fruitful results of CP should be
implemented by adopting the concept of product modification, source reduction and recycling. This
is a existing unit and it will be implemented various techniques of CP in their factory premises and
put continues efforts for developing new techniques. Proposed implementation of techniques of CP
is described below:
 4.4.1 Pollution Prevention-Cleaner Production
 High density polythene bags or drums are used. Hence, the generation of plastic waste will
be reduce. Moreover, Discarded Bags and Container are decontaminated and reuse/sold.
 The unit is maintaining the proper inventory of the hazardous chemicals and keeping the
buffer stock as minimum as possible. This reduces the possibilities & magnitude of
environmental hazards.
 There is a periodic arrangement of environmental training program to create understanding
among plant personnel towards environment.
 Unit will manufacture products with maximum yield by using high-quality of raw material and
advanced process technology.
 To minimize material wastage, standard SOP will be followed by the unit.
4.4.2 Water Conservation-Cleaner Production
 Mopping will be done for floor cleaning.

total 2425 MT/Month
 As a part of water conservation, excess service water taps will not be provided in the plant
premises. Likewise, for the green belt development, water sprinkle system will be used
instead of hose pipe.
 Flow meter will be installed at raw water intake and outlet of Effluent Treatment plant.
 High Pressure Jet Pump will be used for the cleaning of equipment, vessel & rector etc.
4.4.3 Energy Conservation-Cleaner Production

 First step to conserve energy is to identify source of energy utilization.
 Variable frequency drives (VFD) in pumps, whenever required will be provided to save energy.
 Use of low loss transformer instead of conventional transformer.
 Proper air to fuel ratio will be maintained for the maximum efficiency of boiler.
 Good insulation practice will be adopted to prevent heat losses.
 Regular cleaning to the lamps and fixtures will be done to get better illumination in the plant.
 To avoid loss of precious quantum of energy, regular maintenance/ servicing is provided total
the equipment.
 Unit will planning to conduct energy audit regularly as a tool for monitoring purpose.
 Unit will apply White washing on wall to reduce requirement of light.
4.4.4. Reuse / Recycle-Cleaner Production

 The solvent used in the manufacturing process will be recovered through vaporization by
heating and condensation and reused again in the manufacturing process.
 Used oil from the plant & machineries will be reused as a lubricant within plant or sell to MoEF
approved Recyclers.
4.4.5. Good Housekeeping-Cleaner Production

 Good housekeeping means changing existing practices or introducing new ways of operating
and maintaining equipment. Proper good housekeeping can prevent accidents, spillages and

total 2425 MT/Month
leakages, raw material & product loses. For Good housekeeping following practices are
adopted.
 All the materials are stored in compatible group.
 All pits, sumps are properly covered or securely fenced.
 Appropriate tools are provided for handling of all the materials.
 Regular training is given to all workforces. All the passages, floors and stairways are
maintained in good condition. The system is made available to deal with any spillage at the
plant.
 Sufficient disposable bins are clearly marked and these are suitably located in the plant.
 In the plant, precaution and instructions are displayed at strategic locations. Proper working
instructions are given to all the workers in factory.
 Roads/walkway within the plant is maintained neat and clean. Walkways are clearly marked
and free from obstructions.

1CHAPTER 5
ANALYSIS OF ALERNATIVES
(TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

Table of Contents
5.1 Introduction 154
5.2 Introduction Regarding Technology (Cleaner 154
Technology)
Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-
IV, Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat for the manufacturing of synthetic organic
chemicals with total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER -5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)
5.1 INTRODUCTION
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited has proposed to manufacture “Synthetic Organic Pigments” at
GIDC Panoli.
The project proponent did not consider any other alternative site for proposed project because,
 Uninterrupted availability of sufficient water (from GIDC authority).
 No significant physical displacement of the members of the public.
 Connectivity of the site via road and train to procure the raw material and to dispatch the
products.
 Vicinity of common environmental infrastructure; like CETPs, TSDF Site, Co-processing
facilities.
 Marine discharge effluent conveyance system available through common FETP.
 Ready infrastructure- roads, electricity, rail etc available.
 The proposed project being an expansion project within the existing project site, which have
suitable infrastructure facilities viz. water, power, storage, medical, communication, roads,
port and rails etc in/around the premises.
 No land acquisition is required, as sufficient space is available with the existing facility for
the proposed project.
 Minimal environmental and social footprints by utilizing the existing utilities and
infrastructure within the project site. This will also exploit economies of product receipt,
storage & dispatch.
 Increased efficiency of functioning due to common management and unified agency for
utilities, infrastructure and environment, safety & fire operations.
 Adequate safety and fire protection system are built in the design to handle operational
upsets.
5.2 INTRODUCTION REGARDING TECHNOLOGY (CLEANER TECHNOLOGY)
 In our pursuit of excellence, MOL always strive for best available technologies (BAT)
processes that are safe, give quality products, give maximum yields, generate less of
effluents/ by-products and are economical. We have BAT for our existing unit for

manufacturing of existing products and the same will be continued or preferred for our
expansion activity also
 The unit has proposed to convert entire ammonium carbonate solution into ammonium
sulphate crystal. Due to the conversion of this, the unit will also get water for reused
purpose.
 The unit will convert aluminium chloride solution into PAC and Aluminium hydroxide a
value added product commonly used as water treatment chemicals.
 The unit will also use generated spent sulphuric acid for manufacturing ammonium sulphate
for the use as the fertiliser to enrich the fertility of land.
 The unit will not convert spent sulphuric acid into gypsum sludge. Unit will send it to those
units who are having permission of rule-9 or who have applied under rule-9.
 The unit has also proposed to isolate the copper from process stream and convert it into a
valuable product.

CHAPTER 6
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

Table of Contents
6.ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.2 Objectives Of Environmental Management Plan 157
6.3 Implementation Schedule Of Monitoring Measures 157
6.4 Pollution Monitoring And Surveillance System 158
6.4.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 159
6.4.2 Stack Monitoring 159
6.4.3 Noise Monitoring 159
6.4.4 Water And Waste Water Quality Monitoring 159
6.4.5 Monitoring Equipment And Consumables 162
6.5 Cost Provision For Environmental Measures 162
6.5.1 Cost Estimates 163
Table of Tables
Table 6.1 Implementation Pollution Control Measures 158

Table 6.2 Environment Monitoring Plan 160
Table 6.3 List Of Lab Equipment 162
Table 6.4 Budget Allocation For Environmental Management 163
Table of Figures
Figure 6.1 Flow Diagram Of Environment Management Cell 156

CHAPTER -6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL

Company will ensure to conduct all business operations in compliance with applicable laws,
regulations and standards related to occupational Health, Safety and Environment. An
Environmental Management Cell with adequate professional expertise and resources shall be
established to discharge responsibilities related to environmental management including statutory
compliance, pollution prevention, environmental monitoring, etc. The EMC will be made
responsible for all issues related to environmental management of the proposed project facilities.
There shall be EHS department for overseeing all environment and safety responses to ensure the
implementation of EMP mentioned during construction and operation phase including findings /
recommendations of third party audits and monitoring results as mentioned in the EMP.
At least one permanent employee with adequate educational and professional qualification and
experience to discharge responsibilities related to environmental management including statutory
compliance, pollution prevention, environmental monitoring will be employed by company and will
directly report to the Director of the organization operations. Environment management cell is
shown in below Figure 6.1.
FIGURE: 6.1
FLOW DIAGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

A separate Environmental Management Cell / Organogram as shown in Figure 6.1 to be set-up to

undertake the monitoring of the environmental pollution level by measuring stack emissions,
ambient air quality, wastewater quality, noise level etc., and development of greenbelt as per
Environmental Management Plan. Environmental Management Cell will meet at least once a
month to assess the progress and analyze the data collected for the month as per the
environmental monitoring program ,Safety and Environmental policy attached as ANNEXURE-VIII.
Any deviation/variation noticed shall be immediately taken into consideration for improvement of
the same. Yearly action plan of EMP will be updated with respect to results achieved and proposed
activities for next year.
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited will carry out the monitoring to ensure that the pollution is limited
to allowable values and to take preventive / corrective action by either providing new equipments
or by improving the performance of the existing pollution control equipments. The Environmental
Management Organogram will also co-ordinate with all the related activities such as collection of
statistics of health of workers and population of the region and greenbelt development.
6.2 OBJECTIVES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
 To comply with the statutory requirements of monitoring for compliance with conditions of
NOC.
 To comply with the provision of Factory Act & MSIHC Rules.
 To verify the results of the impact assessment study in particular with regards to new
development.
 Identification of any significant adverse transformation in environmental condition to plan
additional mitigation measures; if & as required.
 To check or assess the efficiency of the controlling measures.
 To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact assessment study,
do not become critical through the commissioning of new project.
 To establish a data base for future Impact Assessment Studies for new project.
6.3 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE OF MONITORING MEASURES

Monitoring should be done as periodically to understand the environmental condition of the site.
The mitigation measures suggested in the Chapter-4 should be implemented so as to reduce the
impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed project. In order to facilitate easy
implementation, mitigation measures are phased as per the priority implementation. The priority of
the implementation schedule is given in Table 6.1

TABLE 6.1
IMPLEMENTATION POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
Sr.No. Required Measures Stage Remarks

1. Air pollution control During operation ESP with water scrubber will
measures stage be provided to flue gas
emission stacks.
2. Ground Water During construction As per IS 10500 Standard

Criteria and Drinking and Operation Quarterly monitor quality of
Water parameter. stage. water.
3. Waste Water Operation phase of Treated at ETP
Treatment the project
4. Greenbelt During construction Plantation will be done along

development stage & operation the boundary and outside the
stage. premises.
5. Solid waste disposal Construction and Solid waste to be segregated
operation phase of and disposal as per guideline.
the project
6. Hazardous waste Operation phase of Collection /storage
disposal the project /transportation /disposal at
TSDF- BEIL & RSPL,
Ankleshwar & disposal as per
Hazardous waste rule 2016.
6.4 POLLUTION MONITORING AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
Regular monitoring of important parameters is of immense importance to assess the status of

environment during plant operation. With the knowledge of baseline conditions, a properly
planned monitoring program can serve as an indicator for assessment of any deterioration in
environment conditions. This will facilitate undertaking suitable measures to mitigate adverse
impact during the operation of the plant and further help to protect the environment in the area.
The main attributes for which monitoring shall be carried out are:

 Ambient Air Quality

 Stack Emission
 Effluent water Quality
 Noise Level
The above mentioned sources will be monitored so as to meet the requirements of the State
Pollution Control Board.
6.4.1 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

The ambient air quality with respect to PM10, PM2.5, SO2, and NO X shall be monitored at ETP,
process area, storage area and one location in downwind direction. The frequency of monitoring
will be every three month by external approved monitoring agency.
The log book shall be maintained at environment cell for evaluation of impact and to decide
required migratory measures.
6.4.2 STACK MONITORING
All the flue gas stacks in the proposed project shall be monitored with respect to temperature,
oxides of nitrogen (NO X), Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) and Sulphur dioxide (SO 2) level.
The process stacks shall be monitored for PM, HCl, Cl 2, &NH3.
6.4.3 NOISE MONITORING
Monitoring of noise levels is essential to assess the effectiveness of Environmental Management

Plan implemented to reduce noise levels. A good quality sound level meter and noise exposure
meter may be procured for the same. Audiometric tests shall be conducted periodically for the
employees working close to the high noise sources. The noise levels due to
machines/equipments viz. compressor, motors, engines etc shall be monitored regularly.
6.4.4 WATER AND WASTE WATER QUALITY MONITORING
Daily analysis of effluent stream is recommended. Sampling and analysis of the raw effluent,
collection tank, Primary Settling Tank & Multiple Effective Evaporator will be conducted
regularly.Online meter will be fitted for monitoring of flow, pH, COD.
The detailed monitoring plan is tabulated in Table 6.2.

TABLE: 6.2
EMISSION MONITORING PLAN
Sr. Description Location Parameter To Frequency of Monitoring
No. be Monitored
1. Flue Gas Emission Utilities PM ,SO2 and NOX Monitoring will be done by
Monitoring Plan online monitoring systems for
PM in boiler, TFH and
external monitoring agency
once in three months.
2. Process Emission Reactor Vessels, PM, HCl, Cl2 & Quarterly by external
Monitoring Plan Spin flash Drier NH3. monitoring agency.
Online monitoring system
with alarm facility for Cl2 and
HCl.
3. Fugitive Emission Process area & Relevant solvent Quarterly by external
Monitoring Plan storage area (VOC) and acidic monitoring agency.
fumes.
4. Ambient Air ETP, Process PM10,PM2.5, SO2, Quarterly by external
Monitoring Plan area,storage area NOX monitoring agency
and one location
in downwind
direction
5. Noise Monitoring Any five location Noise Quarterly by external
within company monitoring agency in day
premises time and night time.
6. Water Quality Monitoring

6.1 Effluent Quality Primary For TDS, pH, 1) Every three month by
Before equalization tank COD,TSS, external approved monitoring
Neutralization Ammonical agency.
nitrogen,
Chlorides, 2) Every day by self-
Sulfates, oil and analytical facility.
grease
6.2 Effluent quality Neutralization For TDS, pH, 1) Every three month by
after neutralization Tank COD, TSS, external approved monitoring

Sr. Description Location Parameter To Frequency of Monitoring

No. be Monitored
Ammonical agency.
nitrogen. 2) Every day by self-
analytical facility.
6.3 Effluent quality Bio-Reactor For TDS, pH, Every day by self-analytical
after Aeration Tank COD, TSS, facility.
Chlorides,
Ammonical
nitrogen.
6.4 Effluent quality At Holding Tank For TDS, pH, COD Every day by self-analytical
after Clarifier facility.
6.5 Effluent quality At CETP inlet For TDS, pH, 1) Online meter is already
after PSF & and COD, Turbidity & installed with recording
Activated Carbon NH3-N facility.
Filter 2) Every day by self-
analytical facility.
7. Water Quantity Monitoring
7.1 Inlet & Outlet ETP Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.2 Inlet & Outlet Boiler Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.3 Inlet & Outlet Cooling Tower Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.4 Inlet Process Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.5 Inlet Domestic Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.6 Inlet & Outlet RO permeate Quantity in KL Flow meter
7.7 Inlet & Outlet STP Quantity in KL Flow meter
8. Hazardous Waste Sludge drying pH, COD, Comprehensive analysis
Monitoring bed Chloride, every 2 year.
Alkalinity, Organic
content.
9. Electricity Consumption Monitoring
9.1 ETP Plant Low TDS effluent Electricity Separate electricity meter
treatment plant and daily reading will be
noted.
9.2 Air pollution control Scrubbers Electricity Separate electricity meter
system and daily reading will be
noted.

6.4.5 MONITORING EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES

A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items will be provided for monitoring of important
environmental parameter. Alternatively, monitoring can be outsourced from NABL / MoEF&CC
recognized laboratory.
TABLE: 6.3
IN-HOUSE MONITORING FACILITY
Sr. No. Parameter Equipment

1. COD COD digester
2. Ammonical Nitrogen Heating mantle
3. TDS TDS meter
4. Conductivity Conductivity meter
5. pH pH meter
6. MLSS Oven
7. MLVSS Muffle furnace
AIR ANALYSIS
9. HCl Online Monitoring
10. Cl2 System
11. Ammonia
12. PM, Sox, NOx Online Monitoring
System
6.5 COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES

For environment protection, management and pollution control and treatment and monitoring
systems, appropriate budgetary provision would be made and provision for recurring expenditure
for environment management of the project would be made. The details of budget allocation during
construction phase and operation phase are given in Table 6.3.

6.5.1 COST ESTIMATES

TABLE 6.4
BUDGET ALLOCATION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Sr. Pollution Control Measures Operating cost
No. (Rs. In Lakhs)
1. Dust suppression during construction 10
TOTAL 10
OPERATION PHASE
Sr. Pollution Control Measures Approximate Approximate
No. Capital Cost Recurring Cost
(Rs. In Lakhs) Per Annum
(Rs. In Lakhs)
1. Air Pollution Control & Monitoring 100 30
2. Water Pollution Control& Monitoring 280 367
3. Green Belt 10 1
(Premises and outside premises.)
4. Solid Waste Management 50 150
5. Fire Safety & Equipment 50 10
TOTAL 490 558

1CHAPTER 7
RISK ASSESSMENT
Table of Contents
7.1 Scope Of This Study 164

7.2 Methodology Of Risk Assessment 165
7.2.1 Objectives Of Risk Assessment 165
7.2.2 Plant Layout 167
7.3 Risk Assessment 171
7.3.1 Qualitative Risk Assessment 171
7.3.1.1 Storage And Handling Of Solid Chemicals 174
7.3.1.2 Storage And Handling Of Acids 175

7.3.1.3 Storage And Handling Of Caustic Lye 177
7.3.2 Quantitative Risk Assessment 179
7.4 Comments / Recommendations Based On Consequence Analysis 198
7.5 Arrangements For Ensuring Health & Safety Of Workers Engaged In Handling Of Hazardous 200
Materials
7.5.1 Safety Precautions 200
7.5.2 Fire Control Plan 201
7.5.3 Ways To Minimize The Manual Handling Of The Hazardous Chemicals 202
7.5.4 Safe Operating Procedure 202
7.6 On Site And Offsite Emergency Management Plan 203
7.6.1 Defining The Nature/Level Of Emergency 203
7.6.2 Objectives Of Emergency Management System 204
7.6.3 Structure Of Emergency Management System 204
7.6.4 Commmunication System 215
7.7 Occupational Health & Safety 218
7.7.1 Occupational Health 218
7.7.2 Hospital Facilities 218
7.7.3 Factory Medical Officer/Ohc 218

7.7.4 Plan For Periodic Medical Checkup 218
7.7.5. Details Of Occupational Health Impacts And Safety 219

Hazards
7.7.6 Workzone Monitoring Arrangements For Hazardous 219
Chemicals
7.7.7 Action Plan For Safe Handling & Safety System 220
7.7.8 Arrangements For Ensuring Health And Safety Of Workers Engaged In Handling Of Toxic 222
Materials
7.7.9 Plan And Fund Allocation To Ensure The Occupational Health & Safety Of All Contract And 222
Casual Workers
7.7.10 Health Evaluation Of Workers (Exposure Specific) 223
7.7.11 Measures Adopted By Company To Keep Air Borne Concentration Of Hazardous Chemicals 224
Below Pel:
7.7.12 Provision Of Industrial Hygienist & Health Evaluation Of Workers 225
7.7.13 Safety Trainings & Mock Drills 225
Table of Tables
7.1(A) Storage Details Of Raw Materials 168
7.1(B) Properties Of Hazardous Raw Materials 169
7.2 Weather Data Used For The Study 180
CHAPTER – 7- RISK ASSESSMENT

ADDITIONAL STUDIES
In order to support the environment impact assessment and environment management plan, following
additional studies have been included in this report.
 Risk Assessment.
 Onsite and Offsite Emergency Plan.
 Occupational Health Program.

7.1 SCOPE OF THIS STUDY:
The QRA study in this report has been conducted considering the Terms of References
(TORs) given by Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF for Environment Clearance (EC).
The study has been carried out with a view to comply the following TOR points:
8. Occupational health
i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and
casual workers
ii. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers' health is
being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision
testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-
placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last
month analysed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of
exposure and department wise.
iii. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of
hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not
within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that
health of the workers can be preserved,
iv. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health
and Safety.
xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency
Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster
management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan.

13. Risk assessment for storage and handling of hazardous chemicals/solvents. Action plan
for handling & safety system to be incorporated.
14. Arrangements for ensuring health and safety of workers engaged in handling of toxic
materials.
7.2 METHODOLOGY OF RISK ASSESSMENT
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli, handles various chemicals, some of which are
hazardous in nature by virtue of their intrinsic chemical properties or their operating
temperatures or pressures or a combination of them. Fire, explosion, toxic release or
combinations of them are the hazards associated with industrial plants using hazardous
chemicals. More comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated methods of Safety
Engineering, such as, Hazard Identification and Qualitative/Quantitative Risk Assessment
have been developed to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of industrial plants,
the same has been discussed in detail under their respective headings.
7.2.1 OBJECTIVES OF RISK ASSESSMENT
Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and
assessment of risks the neighbouring populations are exposed to as a result of hazards
present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure probability, credible accident scenario,
vulnerability of population etc. Much of this information is difficult to get or generate.
Consequently, the risk analysis is often confined to maximum credible accident studies.
Risk assessment is carried out with the following objectives:
1. To identify hazard and risk resulting from the hazards
2. To study and foresee the effects of such risks on the workers, public, property and
environment and to find out necessary control measures to prevent or minimize risk.
3. To comply the legal requirement by various safety and environment laws of the country
like…
 The Factories Act, 1948.
 The Gujarat Factories Act, 1963.
 The Environment Protection Act and Rules, 1986.
 Hazardous waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989.
 Public Liability Insurance Act & Rules,1991.

 Chemical Accident, (Emergency, planning, preparedness and response) Rules,1996.

4. To get the necessary information for Emergency planning and evacuation.

7.2.2 PLANT LAYOUT
The below plant layout shows details of storage of Raw materials and adequate margin
all-round the periphery.
Chlorine Storage.
Future expansion plant –C(68)
MEK, IBA, Xylene Storage area.

Tank yard (12)

Table 7.1 A: Storage Details of Raw Materials
Name of the Individual

Sr. Mode of Possible type
Raw Storage State Control Measures provided
No. Storage of hazards
Materials Capacity
Methyl Ethyl Tank MS  Proper storage area for tank and dyke are
1 10 MT Liq. Flammable
Ketone (10 KL) provided.
 PPEs like Splash goggles, Full suit, Boots,
Tank MS
2 IBA 17 MT Liq. Flammable Gloves etc., are used while handling this
(20 KL)
chemical.
Tank MS  Vapour respirator and Self-contained
3 XYLENE 18 MT Liq. Flammable
(20 KL) breathing apparatus are used.
 Self-Contained Breathing apparatus are

used.
 PPEs like Splash goggles, Full suit, Boots,
Gloves etc., are used.
CHLORINE Tonner MS
4 18 MT Gas Toxic  Only trained personnel are allowed to work in
GAS (900 Kg)
this area.
 Safety Shower/Eye wash Stations are made
available, wherever required.
 Specialist is consulted, if required

NOTES:
1. Size of the biggest storage tank is 20 KL and dyke of sufficient capacity i.e. 10% extra than tank capacity will be provided
2. The unit shall be classified as Non-Major Accident Hazard (MAH) unit based on the quantity of Hazardous Chemicals stored at site,
are well below the threshold storage quantity as per schedules of Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals (MSIHC)
Rules of major hazardous chemicals.
Table 7.1 B: Properties of Hazardous Chemicals (i.e. Hazardous Characteristics & Toxicity)
VAP IDLH TLV-

VAP. LD50 STEL
SP. . PR. LD50 VALUE TWA
PHYSICAL
Sr. FP BP DEN. LEL UEL ORAL

STATE
LC50 BY
CHEMICAL GR @ @ DERMAL BY BY
No. ( OC) ( OC) VS % % MG/ MG/L OSHA
20OC 20O MG/KGS ACGIH/ OSHA
AIR KGS (PPM)
C NIOSH (PPM)
Close 2460 3400

1.2
1. Iso Butanol Liq. d 108 0.806 2.56 1.2 10.9 mg/kg mg/kg - - - -
KPA
Cup: [Rat.] [Rabbit.].
28°C
655 435
21- 135- 0.9 4300
2. Xylene Liq. 0.87 3.7 1 7.1 12400 4550 - mg/m³ mg/m³
27 155 KPa (Rat)
15 8 hours

minutes
0.5
3. Chlorine Gas N.A -34 2.473 2.5 5168 NA NA NA NA 293 ppm 10 ppm 1 ppm
ppm
12667
ppm
2737 (mammal
mg/kg )
(oral, rat) 13333
79.6 >5000 3000 300 200
4. MEK Liq. -86 0.806 2.41 9.5 1.8 10 4050 ppm
4 [Rabbit] ppm ppm ppm
mg/kg (mouse,
(oral, 2 hr)
mouse) 7833
ppm (rat,
8 hr)

7.3 RISK ASSESSMENT
Identification of hazards in the project activity is of primary significance. Hazard states

the characteristics of system/plant/process that presents potential for an accident. All
the components of a system/plant/process are need to be thoroughly examined to
assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of
events, which can be termed as an accident.
HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION AND DETAILS OF PROPOSED SAFETY SYSTEMS

At M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli, major risks have been identified for the
following area:
 Future Expansion Plant: C (68)
 Tank Yard (12)
As a conservative approach, we have analysed the risk qualitatively and quantitatively

both, as mentioned below.
In this study,
 The Storage & Handling of Chlorine gas, Xylene, IBA and MEK has been considered
for Quantitative Risk Assessment (Consequence Analysis). Its storage location has
been shown in Figure-7.1. Hazardous properties of these chemical have been
summarized in Table 7.1 B.
 Storage & Handling of Solid Chemicals, Caustic Lye and Acids Handling have been
considered for Qualitative Risk Assessment.
7.3.1 QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT

Many a times Risk involved in various processes / process equipments cannot be
addressed completely by Consequence Analysis. As a conservative approach, these risks
have been considered separately under this topic. The approach is to identify hazards
associated in operation of equipments as well as in processes, assessing its impacts,
ranking the risk posed by it and finally to propose remedial actions/mitigation measures
such that the risk is minimized to tolerable level.
The Risk Matrix presented below should be referred in evaluating this assessment.

In Qualitative Risk Assessment, risk has been analysed using methodology called
HIRA-Hazards Identification & Risk Assessment. In HIRA, major manual activities carried
out by plant personnel as well as contract labours have been considered.
For the following areas, Qualitative Risk Assessment has been carried out to identify the
risk, ranking them as per their severity & probability, identifying the existing mitigation
measures and finally to propose recommendations, if existing measures are not enough.
1. Storage & Handling of Solid Chemicals.

2. Storage & Handling of Acids.
3. Storage & Handling of Caustic Lye
RISK MATRIX FOR QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT
SEVERITY
Major/ Moderate
Minor/ Insignificant/N
Catastrophic Critical (Less
LIKEHOOD/ Marginal egligible (No
(Death/ System (Serious Serious
PROBABILITY (Minor Injury/ injury/
Loss) injury/ Injury/
Illness) Illness)
Illness) Illness)
5 4 3 2 1
Almost
5 H H H M M
Certain
Likely 4 H H M M L
Possible 3 H M M M L
Unlikely 2 M M M L L
Impossible 1 M M L L L

RISK
RISK
ACCEPTABILITY REMARKS
RANGE
CRITERIA
H Unacceptable/ Management’s Decision/Action Plan Required. Potential off-site

High Impact.
M Medium Generally Minor Impact. Acceptable with Management’s Review.

Specific monitoring or SOP to be followed.
L Low Acceptable without Review. Manage through Routine Procedure.

Expansion of manufacturing facility located at plot no: - 20, 21 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli, and District: Bharuch, Gujarat for
the manufacturing of synthetic organic chemicals with total 2425 MT/Month
7.3.1.1 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SOLID CHEMICALS

RISKS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SOLID CHEMICALS HANDLING
Residual
Initial Risk
Risk
Health &
Process Or Associated Additional
Sr. Safety Impact Existing Measures
Likelihood
Likelihood
Activity Hazards Recommendations
Severity
Severity
(Risk)
Risk
Risk
1. Handling  Chemical dust  Skin/Eye 2 3 M  Chemicals are stored in 2 2 L 1. Operators/Workers
Chemical bags Exposure irritation. isolated storage rooms to be trained for
having provision for Safe Work
natural & forced Practices.
ventilation. 2. Chemical handling
 Suitable PPEs are bags to be labeled
used. and segregated
properly.
2. Cleaning of  Fumes  Severe 4 3 M  Spillage is cleaned or 2 2 L
Chemical Inhalation. irritation to neutralized with suitable
Spillage.  Dust eyes, skin. media.
Exposure.  Inhalation.  Cleaning activities are

carried out under strict

vigilance.
 Provision for natural &

forced ventilation is
available.
7.3.1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING OFACIDS

RISKS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ACID HANDLING
Initial Risk Residual Risk

Health &
Sr. Process Or Associated Additional
Safety Impact Existing Measures
Likelihoo
Likelihoo
Severity
Severity
Activity Recommendations
Risk
Risk
No Hazards
(Risk)
d
1. Acids Loading  Exposure to  Skin/Eye 4 C M  Loading & Unloading 5 B L 1. Operators/Workers
& Unloading. acidic fumes irritation. activity is carried out to be trained for
due to in well-ventilated area. Safe Work
 Toxic Vapour
leakage. Practices.
inhalation  Neutralization media
 Spillage of etc. is made available in 2. Health checkup of
acids. areas where acids are the concerned
stored/handled/used. personnel to be
carried as per the

 PPEs are used. plan.
2. Working in  Exposure to  Severe 4 C M  Storage area is well 5 B L

Storage Area. acid fumes. irritation to ventilated.
eyes, skin.
 Acid proof flooring is
 Body burns. available.
 Neutralization is done
immediately with soda
ash/lime or spill is
absorbed in sand or
by suitable adsorbent.
 PPEs like face mask,

gloves etc. are worn
by concerned person.

7.3.1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CAUSTIC LYE
RESIDUAL
INITIAL RISK
HEALTH & RISK
PROCESS ADDITIONAL
SR. ASSOCIATED SAFETY
LIKELIHOOD
LIKELIHOOD
OR MEASURES PROVIDED RECOMMENDATIO
No. HAZARDS IMPACT
SEVERITY
SEVERITY
ACTIVITY NS
(RISK)
RISK
RISK
1 Caustic Lye  Exposure  Skin burn. 2 3 M  Stored in well- 2 2 L 1. Proper trainings to
handling due to  Eye irritation ventilated area. be provided to the
/Loading & leakage from and  Eye wash stations are operators/workers
Unloading joints, respiratory made available nearby. 2. SOPs to be
corroded disorder.  Maintenance is carried prepared and
lines failure as per schedule. followed the same.
etc.  PPEs are used. 3. Corroded lines to
be painted /
replaced.
2 Working in  Exposure  Severe 2 2 M  Neutralization media is 2 1 L

Storage due to irritation to made available.
Area spillage eyes, skin  PPEs like face mask,

etc. gloves etc. are worn by
 Internal concerned person.
body burns.  Eye wash stations are

available nearby.

7.3.2 QUANTITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT
Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) is a structured approach to identifying and

understanding the risks associated with Storage and Handling of flammable/toxic
chemicals. The assessment starts by taking into account an inventory of hazardous
chemicals stored, likelihood of leakage/spillage associated with it and selecting the worst
case scenario for consequence estimation.
Finally, suggesting the measures to minimize or mitigate risks to meet appropriate
acceptability criteria. The planning for emergency evacuation shall be borne in mind whilst
interpreting the results.
 CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
In a plant handling hazardous chemicals, the main hazard arises due to storage and
handling of hazardous chemicals as mentioned above. If these chemicals are released
into the atmosphere, it may cause damage due to resulting fires or vapour clouds. Blast
Overpressures depend upon the reactivity class of material between two explosive limits.
 DAMAGE CRITERIA
In Consequence Analysis studies, in principle of exposure to hazardous effects are
distinguished:
1. Heat radiation, from a jet fire, pool fire, a flash fire or a BLEVE, Toxic Dispersion.
In the next paragraph, the chosen damage criteria are given and explained as per the
Guidelines for QRA – Phast (Micro) Software (DNV) & Purple Book for QRA released by
Centre for Chemical Process Safety (CCPS).
Intoxication
In this report, LC50 concentration and IDLH concentrations have been considered for
Consequence Analysis.
 ASSUMPTIONS FOR CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
For Consequence Analysis, assumptions regarding Meteorological, Pasquill Stability

Classes, Wind velocity, Ambient Temperature, Relative Humidity, Inventory, Ground
Roughness, Model used etc. are very important. In this report, the following assumptions
have been considered.

i. Meteorological Paste other tables
 Atmospheric Conditions: No Inversion
 Ambient Temperature: 300C has been considered as MCA approach.
 Relative Humidity: As the site is not in rainy zone RH of 50% has been considered.
ii. Pasquill Stability Classes
 Pasquill Stability category F is considered as conservative approach.

iii. Other assumptions:
 Ground Roughness: Ground Roughness has been considered as 0.3 M.
 Dispersion model of both Heavy Model and also Gaussian distribution have been used
as applicable/appropriate.
 Inventory: Release of 100% of the inventory has been considered. For this, failure of
the container has been considered from the bottom.
 Storage conditions: Storage conditions have been considered as they are practically
stored at site.
Following Weather data has been used for the study:
Table no 7.2 Weather data used for the study
PASQUILL
WIND SPEED (M/S)
STABILITY
1.5 F
1.5 D
5 D
 SOFTWARE USED FOR CALCULATIONS
1. PHAST
 SCENARIOS CONSIDERED FOR CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS

1. In this study, the scenarios for consequence analysis have been selected considering:
 The physical and chemical properties of hazardous materials,
 Storage conditions & Modes of Storage,
 Hazards ranking by NFPA,

 Guidelines by OSHA (29 CFR),
 Operating and storage conditions of handling and storage of hazardous chemical.

2. This report considers the worst case scenario which is possible during any set of
operation variable and production methodologies. The objective of the study is
emergency planning, hence only holistic & conservative assumptions are used for
obvious reasons. Hence though the outcomes may look pessimistic, the planning for
emergency concept should be borne in mind whilst interpreting the results.
3. Identification of solvents/chemicals to be considered for Consequence Modeling:
Out of all the chemicals and solvents being handled and used within the site; most
hazardous chemicals have been identified based on their properties like flash point,
LEL & UEL Limits and NFPA rating. The results, outcomes, effects and
recommendations suggested for these chemicals will be applicable for all the other
chemicals which are less hazardous in nature.
In this regard, the failure cases which may lead to release of hazardous chemicals
are as under, put of which the worst case relevant scenario shall be considered:
 Possible Release/Leakage due to failure of Unloading Arm of Tanker.
 Leakage from Flange/Ferrule Joints from Cylinder.

4. In this study, results of consequence analysis shall be used for;
a. Emergency Planning
b. Deciding Evacuation Routes
c. Deciding Location of Assembly Points and ECC
d. Resource Allocation for mitigation

5. SCENARIOS IDENTIFIED FOR CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS
Description of Storage Pressure

Scenarios Scenarios considered
Scenario & Temp.
FLAMMABLE SCENARIOS
1. Xylene Ambient Flash Fire, Late Pool Fire, VCE
2. IBA Ambient Flash Fire, Late Pool Fire, VCE
3. MEK Ambient Flash Fire, Late Pool Fire, VCE
TOXIC SCENARIOS
Temp: Ambient
4. Chlorine Dispersion
Pressure: 4 bar
Considerations Made:
 In Case of Xylene, IBA, MEK we have considered the failure case of unloading line (2” i.e. 50
mm pipe dia.) during the unloading of these chemicals from their respective tankers for a
period of 10 mins. As the solvents tankers are compartmentalized, the maximum release
quantity equals the storage quantity of a single compartment.
 In Case of Chlorine have considered the following scenario
 Considering LC50 concentration – 293 ppm & IDLH concentration – 10 ppm
 Leak from 4 mm hole size.
Selection Criteria of Scenarios:
o As per the relevant guidelines for consequence analysis, we have considered the
maximum credible scenarios for all the above mentioned chemicals, which is the
representative of all kinds of minor/major leakages.
o Modeling has been carried out for dispersion up to LC50 concentration and IDLH
concentration, in case of toxic chemical. Evacuation should be carried out in less than 30
min from the area covered under IDLH in case of relevant leakage scenario. The purpose
is to avoid irreversible health effects to persons inside the area of IDLH concentration.
o Based on the above considerations and the input parameters considered for worst case
scenarios, the risk contours are plotted on the plant layout map clearly showing which of the
facilities would be affected in case of an accident taking place. Based on the same the

safety measures/recommendations are provided and On-Site & off-Site emergency plan is
prepared as mentioned under the section 7.6.

SCENARIO # 1 – RELEASE OF IBA
Basis: Possible Release/Leakage due to failure of Unloading Arm of Tanker
Input Data
Leak Size considered 50 mm
Release rate 4.412 Kg/sec
Pressure Atmospheric Pressure
Temperature 30 deg C
Weather Condition 1.5/F, 1.5/D, 5/D
LFL 17000 ppm
UFL 109000 ppm
CASE:1 FLASH FIRE
CASE:2 VAPOUR CLOUD EXPLOSION (OVERPRESSURE RESULTS)
CASE:3 LATE POOL FIRE (EFFECTS OF RADIATION LEVEL)

Risk Contour for Flash Fire:
Risk Contour for VCE:

Risk Contour for Late Pool Fire:

SCENARIO # 2– RELEASE OF XYLENE
Input Data
Release rate 4.811 kg/sec
Pressure Atmospheric pressure
LFL 11000 ppm
UFL 70000 ppm
CASE:1 FLASH FIRE



SCENARIO # 3– RELEASE OF MEK
Input Data
Release rate 4.58 kg/sec
Pressure Atmospheric pressure
LFL 100000 ppm
UFL 18000 ppm
CASE:1 FLASH FIRE
CASE:4 JET FIRE (EFFECTS OF RADIATION LEVEL)


Risk Contour for Jet Fire:


SCENARIO # 4– RELEASE OF CHLORINE
Basis: Possible Release/Leakage due to damage to ferrule joint
Input Data
Leak Size Considered 4 mm
Temperature 30°C
Weather Condition 1.5/F, 1.5/D & 5/D
IDLH 10 ppm
LC50 293 ppm
Dispersion Distances:
Sr. Downwind Distance (meters)

Concentration
No. Category 1.5/F Category 1.5/D Category 5/D
1 IDLH (10ppm) 388.85 156.22 70.19
2 LC50 (293 ppm) 38.81 33.60 No Hazard
Risk Contour for IDLH Concentration:

Risk Contour for LC50 Concentration:

 CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS SUMMARY

Flash Fire Scenarios:
Distance (meters)
SR. Concentration
Scenario Category Category Category
No. (ppm)
1.5/F 1.5/D 5/D
1. Release of LFL Frac.8500 17.17 23.22 9.12
IBA
LFL. 17000 10.97 13.29 3.24
Release of LFL Frac.5500 23.85 26.93 11.50

2.
Xylene LFL. 11000 16.16 18.32 4.82
Release of LFL Frac.9000 40.61 47.22 22.67

3.
MEK LFL. 18000 31.12 35.18 13.15
Explosion Overpressure Scenarios:
Downwind Distance (meters)

SR. Overpressure
Scenario Category Category Category
No. (Bar)
1.5/F 1.5/D 5/D
0.02068 24.73 42.36 NR

Release of
1 0.1379 13.81 25.79 NR
IBA
0.2068 12.95 24.48 NR
Release of 0.02068 54.45 38.23 22.58
2 Xylene 0.1379 28.92 24.72 13.25
0.2068 26.90 23.65 12.52
0.02068 128.95 101.24 46.43
Release of
3 0.1379 63.03 55.85 26.84
MEK
0.2068 57.82 52.27 25.29

Jet Fire Scenarios:
Radiation Downwind Distance (meters)

SR.
Scenario Level Category Category
No. Category 5/D
2
(KW/m ) 1.5/F 1.5/D
4 17.93 19.32 24.68

Release of 12.5 NR NR 23.11
1
MEK 25 NR NR NR
37.5 NR NR NR
Pool Fire scenarios:
Radiation Downwind Distance (meters)

SR.
Scenario Level Category Category
No. Category 5/D
2
(KW/m ) 1.5/F 1.5/D
4 47.23 47.14 53.34

Release of 12.5 21.20 21.13 24.07
1
IBA 25 NR NR NR
37.5 NR NR NR
4 49.57 49.45 60.67
Release of 12.5 20.53 20.46 20.06
2
Xylene 25 NR NR NR
37.5 NR NR NR
4 48.11 47.78 55.03
Release of 12.5 20.44 20.33 20.27
3
MEK 25 NR NR NR
37.5 NR NR NR

Toxic Dispersion:
Sr. Downwind Distance (meters)

Concentration
No. Category 1.5/F Category 1.5/D Category 5/D
Chlorine
1 IDLH (10ppm) 388.85 156.22 70.19
2 LC50 (293 ppm) 38.81 33.60 No Hazard
7.4 COMMENTS / RECOMMENDATIONS BASED ON CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS

Flash Fire, Pool Fire & UVCE Scenarios:
 In case of release of MEK, it will travel to the farthest distance of 47.22 mtr in 1.5/D
weather condition. If it gets a source of ignition within this radius, it may create UVCE
(Unconfined vapor cloud explosion) and effects of overpressure (0.02068 bar) would be
felt up to 128.95 m.
 In case of release of Xylene vapour travels to the farthest distance (60.67m) in 5/D having
radiation level 4 Kw/m2.
 Evacuation plan to be designed considering the worst case scenario of MEK as
mentioned above.
Jet Fire Scenarios:
 In case of Jet fire, the highest distance covered by MEK is 24.68 m in case of 5/D weather
condition for 4 KW/m2 radiation level.
Toxic Release Scenario:
 In case of toxic release scenario for Chlorine, dispersion covers more distance (388.85 m)
in case of 1.5/F weather condition.
 Evacuation plan to be designed considering the above mentioned worst case scenario of
dispersion distance.
Recommendations:
 Evacuation routes shall be planned such that alternate route is available from any corner
in more than one direction.
 Extra precautions to be taken in unloading of flammable/toxic chemicals. The details of
precautions during storage handling and transportation of chemicals have been given in
separate paragraph.
 Hazard Identification Studies like HAZOP, HAZAN, Fault tree analysis, Event tree
analysis, Checklist Audit etc. will be carried out (if required) for safe operation of plant.
 Safety audit (i.e. Third Party Safety Audit as per IS: 14489) and it's Compliance shall be
carried out as per the frequency decided by the management. Audit is an important tool to
identify organizational & operational safety policy, and practices, plant conditions or
operating procedures that could lead to an accident and significant losses in life or
property and their effectiveness against accident preventative program.

7.5 ARRANGEMENTS FOR ENSURING HEALTH & SAFETY OF WORKERS ENGAGED IN

HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.
7.5.1 Following Safety Precautions Are Considered During Transportation, Unloading,

Handling & Storage Of Solvent, etc.) for its existing facilities, the same shall be
updated to cover the new facilities, if required:
Sr. ACTIVITY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1 Transportation of  Training is given to driver and cleaner regarding the

Solvents/chemicals safe driving, hazards of chemicals, emergency
by road trucks, handling, and use of SCBA sets.
Tankers.  TREM card is kept with TL.
 SCBA set is kept with TL.
 Fire extinguishers are kept with TL.
 Instructions are given not to stop road truck in

populated area.
 Hazard Identification symbol and emergency telephone

number are displayed as per HAZCHEM CODE.
 Appropriate PPEs are kept with TL.
In case of leak or spill:
 Source of leakage are checked.
 Damaged containers or spilled materials are not

attended without wearing appropriate protective
clothing.
 Leak is stopped, if possible to do so without risk.
 Water spray is used to reduce vapors (but do not put

water directly on leak, spill area or inside container).
 Combustibles (wood, paper, oil, etc.) are kept away

from spilled material.

2 Unloading Activity  Priority is given to Truck to immediately enter the

storage premises at site and is not kept waiting near
the gate.
 Security person checks License, TREM CARD, Fire

extinguisher condition; and required PPEs as per SOP
laid down.
Following precautions are taken during unloading:
 Wheel stopper is provided to TL.
 Flexible SS hose connection is done at TL outlet line.
 All TL valves are closed in TL.
 Only day time unloading is permitted.
3 Solvents Storage  All storage areas are isolated from all sources of open
safety. flame and well posted with' NO SMOKING' signs and
provided with adequate fire fighting/extinguishing
systems.
 Combustibles (wood, paper, oil, etc.) are kept away

from spilled material.
 Fire fighting facilities (along with foam attachment) are

available as mentioned below.
 Sand Buckets are available.
7.5.2 FIRE CONTROL PLAN

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli, has considered fire prevention measures at
the project planning stage to avoid any outbreak of fire. But the chances of outbreak of fire
cannot be totally ignored. Hence to tackle such a situation, company has planned to
develop a well- resourced and adequate fire protection system/fire fighting network. The
same facilities shall be updated to cover the expansion facilities also, if required.
Other details on Fire Control Plan and same shall be updated for expansion facility if
required:
 Fire fighting facilities comprising has been installed as per the GFR and TAC
guidelines, the same shall be updated after the expansion of new facilities, if required.

 Fire Extinguishers like DCP, &Carbon Dioxide has been provided as per the GFR and
TAC guidelines, at conspicuous locations.
 Other Fire fighting facilities like, fire hose boxes with hose pipe, sand buckets, fire
blanket etc. shall be provided within the company at conspicuous locations.
 Working staff is given training to operate DCP and CO2 extinguishers.
 Emergency Action Team members are working round the clock in all shifts.
 First aid is available round the clock in all shifts of all plants / sections.
 DG Set is available for power backup.
7.5.3 WAYS TO MINIMIZE THE MANUAL HANDLING OF THE HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS.
1. Forklifts are used for unloading chemical barrels/carboys, their movements within plant,
handling carboys, bulk chemical bags, etc.
2. Cranes, hoists, pallet trucks, conveyors, etc. are used as per the requirement, to
eliminate manual handling.
3. Lifting tools & tackles are used, wherever required.
4. SOPs, work instructions are prepared and followed.
5. Trainings are provided to relevant staff, operators, workers for the risk associated with
manual handling of hazardous chemicals, ways to overcome those risk, etc.
7.5.4 ANTIDOTES DETAILS:
The appropriate antidotes for the hazardous chemicals for the existing facility are available at
site and the same shall be updated & kept available for the expansion facility also.
Following Antidotes for major hazardous chemicals are kept available at the site.
Chemical Antidote / Medical Treatment
Xylene  Wash affected skin with plenty of water. Administer Fresh air or
Oxygen, 0.1 mg/kg slowly through injection rest in bed. Don’t apply
Epinefrin, Ifridin etc. Don’t apply milk, vegetable oil or alcohol
 Diazem – 1 mg/kg. (Intravenous),Epenephia, Efidrine
Chlorine  Deriphylline Inj., Phenobarbitone Inj., Phenobarbitone Tab.
MEK  Activated Charcoal

7.6 ONSITE AND OFFSITE EMERGENCY PLAN

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli has prepared the On-site emergency Plan
which is linked with District Disaster Management Plan. This plan has been prepared
based on the risk contours plotted on the plant layout map clearly showing the facilities
that would be affected, in case an accident takes place.
The purpose of this plan is to provide M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli with the
means to effectively utilize all the resources at their disposal for the protection of life,
environment and property. The same ERP shall be updated after expansion to cover new
plants or facilities, if required. The details of the same are discussed in the following
sections.
7.6.1 DEFINING THE NATURE/LEVEL OF EMERGENCY
THE LEVEL OF EMERGENCY CAN BE CLASSIFIED IN THREE CATEGORIES:

LEVEL - 1:
The leakage or emergency, which is confinable within the plant/area. It may be due to:
a) Small pipe/valve rupture or similar leakages that do not affect outside premises.
b) Release of toxic chemicals for short duration.
c) Small fire in the plant.
LEVEL - 2:
The emergency, which is confinable within the factory premises, may arise due to -
a) Leakage of toxic chemicals for long duration.
b) Medium scale explosion confined to the factory premises.
c) Medium scale fire inside the factory premises.
LEVEL - 3:
The emergency, which is not confinable within the factory premises and general public in
the vicinity are likely to be affected. It may arise due to -
a) Heavy / Profuse leakage of toxic / flammable gases for a long duration.
b) Explosion of high magnitude affecting the adjacent area.
c) Major fire inside the factory premises.

7.6.2 OBJECTIVES OF EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The objectives of the emergency management system are summarized as under.
 To define and assess emergencies, including risk and environment impact assessment.
 To control and contain incidents.
 To safeguard employees and people in vicinity.
 To minimize damage to property or/and the environment.
 To inform employees, the general public and the authority about the hazards/risks
assessed, safeguards provided, residual risk if any and the role to be played by them in
the event of emergency.
 To be ready for ‘mutual aid’ if need arises to help neighbouring unit. Normal jurisdiction
of an OEP is limited to the own premises only, but looking to the time factor in arriving
the external help or off-site plan agency, the jurisdiction must be extended outside to the
extent possible in case of emergency occurring outside.
 To inform authorities and mutual aid centers to come for help.
 To effect rescue and treatment of casualties. To count injured.
 To identify and list any serious injuries and or fatalities.
 To inform and help relatives.
 To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas and to restore normally.
 To provide authoritative information to the news media.
 To preserve records, equipment etc, and to organize investigation into the cause of the
emergency and suggest preventive measures to stop its recurrence.
 To ensure safety of the works before personnel re-enter and resume duty.
 To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide necessary
inputs for emergency preparedness and the periodical rehearsal.
7.6.3 STRUCTURE OF EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli has developed an emergency management

team. The management structure includes the following personnel’s;
 Site Main Controllers.
 Incident Controllers

 Deputy Incident Controllers.
 Key Personnel’s
 Essential Workers.
 SITE MAIN CONTROLLER
He is the head authority of the organization. V.P. – Operations holds the responsibilities of
the site main controller or emergency controller. He is having overall responsibilities for
directing operation.
 From time to time, he will assess the magnitude of the situation and decide if staff needs
to be evacuated.
 Immediately on being informed of the emergency and its location, he will arrive at the
scene & handle the solution.
 He will access the magnitude of the situation and decide if persons need to be
evacuated from the assembly/shelter.
 On his decision he will activate the on-site emergency plan as well as local crisis.
Further,
 He will intimate to District Crisis Group for the further help if condition deteriorates.
 To maintain continuous review of developments and access in consultation with incident

controller and other key personnel.
 To give information to head office and to fire bridge, police, medical, experts, factory
inspector, GPCB and other statutory authorities.
 To provide advice on possible effect on areas surrounding factory premises.
 To ensure that the casualties are receiving adequate attention. Arrange for
hospitalization of victims and additional help if required. Ensure that the relatives are
authentically advised.
 To ensure the accounting of personnel and search of missing persons.
 To control traffic movement for factory premises & surrounding area.
 If emergency is prolonged, arrange for the relief of personnel and catering facility.
 To issue authorised statement to the news media and other authorities.
 To ensure that proper consideration is given to the preservation of evidence arrange for
photograph or video.
 To control rehabilitation of affected areas and victims.

 Do not restart the plant unless, clearance or approval received from the authorities.
 ROLE OF INCIDENT CONTROLLER AND DEPUTY INCIDENT CONTROLLER
His primary duties shall be to take charge at the scene of the incident. In the initial stage he
may be required to take decisions involving the operation of the other plants or to stop or
continue any process and to take technical decisions to control the incident. The deputy
incident controller will take the charge of incident controller, if he is not available due to any
reason. They will be always available in each shift and can take charge of the incident.
Responsibilities/Duties of Incident Controller and Deputy Incident Controller:
 His primary duty is to take over the charge at the scene.
 Direct all operations within the affected area giving the priority to safety of personnel.
 Minimize damage to property, environment and material loss by taking necessary

actions within his control.
 Pending arrival of Main site controller, incident controller takes the responsibility of his
post and direct shut down of plant and evacuates people, if necessary. Further he will
 Intimate and request to the fire, police and medical services for required helps by giving
details of incident/accident/emergency.
 Ensure that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected area are instructed to go to
respective assembly point/shelter and areas are searched for casualties.
 The designated person a mentioned has to perform the role of incident controller, Dy.
Incident Controller during the emergency period. The details are given below.


 KEY PERSONNELS
Responsibilities/Duties of Incident Controller and Deputy Incident Controller:
 The key personnel shall be available at any time on duty or on call when off on holiday.
 The role of key personnel has to perform as per below:
 The change of managerial activity and support to site main controller and incident
controller.
 Immediate communicate to various authority with specific details and request for helps.
 Supervise and execute the work as instructed by Site Main Controller and Incident
Controller
 Handle the situation & cope up the work by fair dealing.
 Report time to time to the Site Main Controller and Incident Controller about your work
status.
 Advice, Counsel, Guide, Suggest or Caution in respect to the handling of emergency to

the SMC/IC as per your knowledge. The list of key personnel is given below.

 ESSENTIAL WORKERS:
They are a task force of trained workers or expert teams to carry out specific job or work at
the time of emergency and perform the duty under guidance of Incident Controller/Site Main
Controller. The list shall be updated from time to time.
Such work will include:
 Fire fighting gas leak and spill control till a Fire Bridge takes the charge.
 Shutting down plant and make it sage.
 Emergency engineering work e.g., isolation equipments, materials, process, providing

temporary by pass lines, safe transfer of substance, urgent repairing or replacement,
electrical work etc.
 Provision of emergency power, water, lighting, instruments, equipments, materials etc.
 Movement of equipments, special vehicles and transport to or from the scene of the
incident.
 Search, evacuation, rescue and welfare
 First Aid and Medical help
 Information to surrounding factories and the public as directed by the Site Main
Controller

 Assistance at communication centre, casualties, reception centre, liaison with FI, Police
etc.
 Any special help required or as directed by Site Main Controller or Incident Controller
 List of essential workers is given below:
OTHER ELEMENTS OF DMP:

 ASSEMBLY POINT
In affected & vulnerable plants, all nonessential workers (who are not assigned any
emergency duty) will be evacuated from the area & they shall report to specified Assembly
Points. Assembly Point is marked at a safe place, well away from area of risk and least
affected by the down wind direction.
To ensure that workers do not have to approach the affected area to reach the Assembly
Point, proper location and number shall be marked at Assembly Points. Each Assembly
Point shall be manned by a nominated person to record the names and dept. At each
Assembly Point, duties of Assembly Point In-charge are displayed in brief. Before reaching
an Assembly Point or subsequently, if it is required to pass through an affected area or due
to presence of toxic substances, suitable PPE's including respirators, helmet etc., shall be
issued & made available with workers. Locations of Assembly Points are given below:

 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTER
The Emergency Control Centre is the place or room from where the operations to handle
the emergency are directed and coordinated.
Ground floor of the administrations building which is located near the main Entrance
and security post is declared as Emergency Control Centre. Location of ECC is away from
the plant hence it is considered as an ideal one. Telephone and other facilities required with
required documents are well displayed near ECC for ready reference. SMC will operate
from ECC. Details regarding ECC are given
The ECC centre is equipped with the following facilities:
 Internal and external telephone including STD facility.
 Telephone directory/ Telephone nos. of mutual aid centres.
 Factory Layout showing evacuation plan, fire fighting arrangements, emergency control
centre, location of assembly points, etc.
 First Aid.
 Gate pass book.
 Muster roll of Workers.
 Work permit book.
 Identity card register.
 Copy of ON SITE/ OFF SITE PLAN.
 Stationeries like- note book, pen, pencils etc.
 SCBA Sets.
 Sand Buckets & Hydrant Network.
 Adequate numbers of PPE's (like dust mask, Air Mask, safety dress, PVC hand gloves,
Full Face piece respirator with 3M cartridge, helmet, goggles, etc).

 FIRE CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS (FIRE FIGHTING, GAS LEAK CONTROL AND

RESCUE OPERATION)
A. Role of EHS Representative:

1. On being notified about the location of fire, he immediately proceeds to the help.
2. Decides his line of action in consultation with Incident controller and takes appropriate
measures to handle the emergency.
3. Assessing the severity of the incident, immediately report to emergency controller
about the gravity of the situation.
4. He assesses the extra requirement required if any, from the neighbouring industry..

 MEDICAL SERVICES
The roles of Medical officers are as follows;

(a) He will report immediately to the SMC/IC.
(b) He will render necessary treatment, at Occupational Health Center.
(c) He will arrange for Hospitalization and Treatment at outside hospitals, if required.
(d) He will mobilize in getting the services of External medical agencies, other Para –
medical services etc. and transportation services etc.
(e) He will arrange for extra medical assistance/antidotes, from out, if required.
(f) He will arrange for first-aid trained volunteers for necessary help.
(g) He will liaise with the Government Health Authorities for treatment of the affected
persons nearby.
 ROLE OF SECURITY IN-CHARGE (SECURITY OFFICER)
 On hearing the emergency siren, he shall find out the location of the incident (fire / gas
leak / spill / explosion) and inform the location of the same to the key personnel coming
to the plant.
 He will depute the security guards for managing gates and traffic control at the incident
site & send remaining guards to the site of incident.
 He will prevent unauthorized entry in to the site
 He will render assistance as demanded by the safety in-charge.
 He will mobilize additional security force for help, if required.
 He will direct ambulance(s) and emergency vehicle(s) to the scene of incident.
 He will help evacuate persons within the scene of incident.
 As directed by the site main controller, he may be required to address the public of
surrounding villages for warning / evacuation.
 ROLE OF MUTUAL-AID MEMBERS
 Company has Mutual Aid with various nearby factories etc.
 On receiving the call, they shall proceed immediately with fire squad & fire tenders.
 They will be guided to the place of the incident by the main gate security guard.

 The fire squad in-charge will report to the safety in-charge of the unit in which the
incident has occurred.
 OTHER ARRANGEMENTS
Other arrangements include external transport (transport centre), heavy vehicles,
lift/cranes, Utilities, generator sets to supply emergency power, and environment monitoring
equipment, special instruments/equipments, rescue items etc. is made available from
Panoli Association or nearby locations, when available resources do not meet the
requirements.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOLLWED DURING EMERGENCY)
 As soon as emergency alarm is heard, all essential workers shall report to IC or SMC.
 They shall carefully listen to the instructions given by IC or SMC
 According to the type of emergency/accident, they shall get equipped with PPE/Fire
fighting equipment and devices.

 The runner among the workers shall inform SMC/IC and key personnel if they are not at
site.
 The messenger amongst the workers shall deliver messages to nearby units as per the
instructions of SMC/IC.
 The in-charge of medical arrangements shall prepare first-aid and other required
facilities for the injured.
 The other essential workers shall try to control the emergency as per the instructions
given to IC.
 IC would keep SMC informed about the status of control measures being taken at the
site and ask for other requirements e.g. Mutual aid, equipment etc. if he find necessary.
 SMC would co-ordinate with outside agencies regarding control measures being taken,
need for external help, evacuation, medical treatment etc.
7.6.4 COMMMUNICATION SYSTEM
After assessing the risk of the emergency / incident, the second step of the plan is
communication.
This chapter deals with the procedure to be followed at the time of emergency to inform
following personnel.
 Incident controller
 Site main controller
 Other key personnel
 Mutual aid centers
 Neighbouring industries and public in vicinity
 Government authorities.
The communication of emergency begins with sounding the siren from the emergency. The
procedure us as under;
 RAISING THE ALARM
As soon as incident takes place inside the factory and is noticed by someone, the first step
shall be to raise the nearest manual emergency bell to alert the nearby people. Next,
he/she shall inform the security persons to raise the emergency siren located at the factory
gate. The security personnel sound the siren.

The alarm sound informs the I.C and the S.M.C that an emergency has been created and
emergency organization is to be activated. The I.C. rushes to the site and shall takes
charge of the scene.
 DECLARING THE MAJOR EMERGENCY
The nominated persons are technically qualified and experienced. They will advice the
incident controller or the Site main controller. The site main controller with the consultation
to technical persons declare major emergency.
The joint decision to declare major emergency shall be taken as early as possible and
without wasting time.
 TELEPHONE MESSAGES
After hearing the emergency siren or even receiving the emergency message on phone,
the telephone operator (security officer) transmit the message to site main controller and
key personnel as per the instruction received from incident controller.
 COMMUNICATION OF EMERGENCY & STATUTORY INFORMATION
Communication of Emergency:
An effective system to communicate emergency has been made to communicate about the
emergency situation as mentioned below:
 Inside the factory i.e. workers including key personnel and essential workers, on duty &
inside during normal working hours.
 To key personnel and essential workers not on duty and outside during normal working
hours.
 To the outside emergency services and the Government authorities.
 To the neighbouring factory & the General Public in the vicinity.

STATUTORY INFORMATION:
a) Information to Workers
Set of Statutory information regarding types of hazards and their prevention and control
as directed in the Factories Act is prepared by the unit. This information is printed in the
local language and given in the form of booklet to all workers including contract
workers.

b) To the outside emergency services and District Emergency Authority
Statutory information in the form of booklet is given to outside emergency services and
authorities, if required.
c) Specific Safety Measure to be taken for neighbouring firms, general public
vicinity & Factory Inspectorate
 Statutory information in the form of booklet, is given to neighbouring units and the
general public of the villages in the vicinity of the unit, if required.
 General Public in the vicinity shall be trained for associated chemical hazards,
safety measures, on-site & off-site emergencies, individual actions required during
emergencies, first aid, etc.
 General Awareness Seminars will be conducted.
 Required safety drills, Off Site drill, etc will be conducted.

7.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY

M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited, Panoli, has prepared the Occupational Health
Surveillance Programme for its existing facility. The same programme shall be updated (if
required) after the expansion, to cover new plants or facilities. The details of the existing
programme are described in the following sections.
7.7.1 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Occupational health needs attention both during construction & erection and operation &
maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the
above phases.
7.7.2 HOSPITAL FACILITIES
Company has made formal agreements with the nearby hospitals, having facilities to attend
fire and toxic effect cases, emergency cases, attending the affected persons in the
emergency arising out of accidents, if any, etc.
Emergency vehicle is available round the clock in the factory to transport the victim/injured
person from the factory to the nearby hospital. Ambulance is equipped with Stretcher, First
aid box, Oxygen Cylinder, Mask, etc.
7.7.3 FACTORY MEDICAL OFFICER/OHC
A qualified doctor has been appointed as FMO on retainer ship basis. Adequate no. of
employees are trained in First aid.
7.7.4 PLAN FOR PERIODIC MEDICAL CHECKUP
Periodic Medical Examination is being conducted as per the following schedule;

Workers employed are examined by a Qualified Medical Practitioner/ Factory Medical

Officer, in the following manner:
(a) Before employment, to ascertain physical fitness of the person;
(b) During employment, once in a period of 6 months, to ascertain physical fitness of the
person to do the particular job;
Medical examinations are then documented in Form no.: 32 & 33 and maintained.
7.7.5 DETAILS OF OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH IMPACTS AND SAFETY HAZARDS
Occupational Hazards Occupational Health Impacts
 Exposure to Toxic Chemicals.  Toxication, Irritation,
 Exposure to Flammable Solvents.  Fall Injury, Electrocution,
 Fire due to Static charge generation  Body Injury, Burns, Skin sensitization,
 Slip/trip, fall, electric shock, etc.  Severe irritation to eyes & skin,
 Spillage/leakage,  Respiratory disorder,
 Overflow,  Damage to nearby equipments,
 Exposure to Corrosive Chemicals.  Fatality, etc
Mitigation measures/Safety Measures provided to avoid the human health hazards are
mentioned under section 7.5. Personal protective equipments like Helmet, Safety shoes/
Gumboots Hand gloves, Gas Mask / Nose Mask, PVC apron, SCBA Set, PVC pressure
suit, Bobble hood are also provided to the required personnel.
7.7.6 WORKZONE MONITORING ARRANGEMENTS FOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS
Work zone monitoring is carried out by independent competent third party every month.
Records are kept in Form No. 37 as per Gujarat Factories Rules. Location for samplings
shall be identified. Samples are analysed for Air borne concentration of hazardous
chemicals in ppm. Following information is incorporated in the format for maintaining
records of work zone monitoring:
 Location/Operation monitored
 Identified contaminant
 Sampling instrument used
 Number of Samples

 Range of contaminant concentration as measured in sample

 Average concentration
 TWA concentration of contaminant (As given in Second Schedule of Factories Act)
 Reference method used for analysis
 Number of workers exposed at the location being monitored
 Signature of the person taking samples
 Other relevant details
7.7.7 ACTION PLAN FOR SAFE HANDLING & SAFETY SYSTEM
Action Plan for Handling the Chemicals:
1. Fork lifts shall be used for unloading chemical drums, drum movements within plant,
handling carboys, bulk chemical bags, etc.
2. Cranes, hoists, pallet trucks, conveyors, etc. shall be used as per the requirement, to
eliminate manual handling.
3. Appropriate PPEs shall be used.
4. Lifting tools & tackles shall be used, wherever required.
5. SOPs, work instructions shall be followed.
6. Training shall be provided to relevant staff, operators, workers for the risk associated
with handling of hazardous chemicals, ways to overcome those risk, etc.
Action Plan for Safety System:
Following action plan for Safety System shall be implemented:

SAFETY ORGANIZATION
Qualified and experienced safety officers are appointed. The responsibilities of the safety
officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and
advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training programs and provide
professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He
is also responsible to ensure compliance of Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions.

SAFETY CIRCLE
In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of hazardous

processes and improving safety and health, safety circle is also constituted. The circle
would consist of about three to four employees. The circle normally meets for about an hour
every week.
SAFETY TRAINING
Safety trainings are provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members
called from Professional Safety Institutions or Universities. In addition to regular employees,
limited contract labours are also allowed to attend safety training. To create safety
awareness, safety films are shown to workers and leaflets are distributed. .

7.7.8 ARRANGEMENTS FOR ENSURING HEALTH AND SAFETY OF WORKERS ENGAGED

IN HANDLING OF TOXIC MATERIALS
Adequate fire fighting requirements and personal protective are available in factory
premises.
Portable fire extinguishers are installed at various locations in the plant and are easily
accessible too. They are regularly inspected for their working conditions. Similarly all PPEs
are maintained in good working conditions so that the same can be utilized in case of
emergency. Essential workers and other personnel are regularly trained to use both fire
fighting and Personal protective equipments.
7.7.9 PLAN AND FUND ALLOCATION TO ENSURE THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH &
SAFETY OF ALL CONTRACT AND CASUAL WORKERS
Company shall prepare Safety Plan and implementation for the new project activity. Also,
management shall allot enough funds to ensure the occupational health & safety of all
contract & causal workers. Details of the same are as follows:
 To allocate sufficient resources (like PPEs) to maintain safe and healthy conditions of
work;
 To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the
design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and equipment;
 Daily briefing/ safety instructions shall be given by security at main gate ,
 Daily checking of helmet and shoes shall be done by security at gate,
 Tool Box Talk by plant personnel before start-up of work, like informing employees about
materials, equipment or processes to be used in their work which shall be known to be
potentially hazardous to health or safety;
 To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making necessary
changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and up to date
knowledge;
 To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness
at work;

 To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to employees in

health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity shall be given to these
matters;
 To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate fire

fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this service;
 To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness and

incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to take corrective, remedial
and preventive action;
 To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and safety
matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
 To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language of

employees;
 To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/processes involved in a

plant; and
 To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all

buildings, equipments, work places and operations.
7.7.10 HEALTH EVALUATION OF WORKERS (EXPOSURE SPECIFIC)
1. Management has devised a plan to check and evaluate the exposure specific health
status evaluation of workers.
2. Workers will be checked for physical fitness with special reference to the possible health
hazards likely to be present, where he/she is being expected to work before being
employed for that purpose. Complete medical examinations including PFT, Urine and
Blood examination, Liver Function tests, chest X-ray, Audiometry, Spirometry Vision
testing, ECG, etc. shall be carried out. However, the parameters and frequency of such
examination will be decided in consultation with Factory Medical Officer and Industrial
Hygienists.
3. While in work also, all the workers will be periodically examined for the health with
specific reference to the hazards which they are likely to be exposed to during work.
Again, the parameters and frequency of such examination will be decided in consultation
with Factory Medical Officer and Industrial Hygienists. Plan of monthly and yearly report
of the health status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety,
will be maintained.
7.7.11 MEASURES ADOPTED BY COMPANY TO KEEP AIR BORNE CONCENTRATION OF

HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS BELOW PEL:
 Each workplace shall be evaluated. Air-borne concentration of toxic chemicals shall be

measured and records to be maintained.
 For purpose of measuring worker exposure across a single shift, a reasonably accurate
exposure measuring device (Alarms will be configured at TLV value) shall be placed
within the worker’s breathing zone, and have it operates for the full shift. Company shall
study the exposure data when the plant is operative.
 To avoid mixing of hazardous chemicals in air; leak surveys shall be conducted every 15
days. LDR (Leak Detection and Rectification) program shall be designed for early
detection of leakages of hazardous chemicals and to rectify leakages.
 Flange/Ferrule joints, pipelines, transfer lines, etc. shall be checked on regular basis for
maintenance purpose.
 Regular maintenance check-up shall be carried out for pumps, equipment, instruments
handling toxic and corrosive chemicals.
 PPEs like Air mask, Berating canisters, SCBA sets, Online breathing apparatus shall be
kept available at the places where there is possibility of presence of toxic chemicals.

7.7.12 PROVISION OF INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST & HEALTH EVALUATION OF WORKERS
1. Management has device a plan to check and evaluate the exposure specific health
status evaluation of workers.
2. Workers are checked for physical fitness with special reference to the possible health
hazards likely to be present, where he/she is being expected to work before being
employed for that purpose. Complete medical examinations including PFT, Urine and
Blood examination, Liver Function tests, chest X-ray, Audiometry, Spirometry Vision
testing, ECG, etc. is carried out. However, the parameters and frequency of such
examinations are decided in consultation with Factory Medical Officer and Industrial
Hygienists and the details of the same are maintained in record.
3. While in work, all the workers are periodically examined for the health with specific
reference to the hazards which they are likely to be exposed to, during work. Again, the
parameters and frequency of such examination are decided in consultation with
Factory Medical Officer and Industrial Hygienists. Monthly and yearly report of the
health status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety is
maintained.
7.7.13 SAFETY TRAININGS & MOCK DRILLS
Safety trainings (on Safe Material Handling, First Aid, & all Safety Aspects) shall be
provided every 15 days by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members
called from other Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular
employees, limited contractor labours will also be given safety training. To create safety
awareness, safety films shall be shown to workers and leaflets are distributed.
MOCK DRILLS
To evaluate the effectiveness of emergency preparedness and to spread the awareness

among employees mock drill will be carried out at the interval of every six months.
After completion of the mock drill, summary report shall be made and corrections will be
done if any weakness has been observed.
FREQUENCY OF MOCK DRILLS:
 On-site emergency : Once every 6 months

 Off-site emergency : Once every year


1CHAPTER 8
PROJECT BENEFITS
Table of Contents

8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility Activities 227
8.3 Economic Development 229
Table of Tables
8.1 Corporate Environment Responsibility 227
total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER -8 PROJECT BENEFITS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Over the years, Group of M/s. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED has focused on impacting rural
education, water conservation, tribal welfare, agriculture, animal husbandry, health and hygiene, disaster
relief and rehabilitation. A number of these projects were replicated by other companies, increasing their
impact.
The company is committed for contribution of funds and provides the services for the upliftment of local
community in the nearby villages and growth in the industrial sector creates new opportunities for
employment and can also help diversify the economy. This is especially important given the high level of
urbanization, growing levels of an employment and poverty in many cities. Synergistic growth in the
chemical industries could have positive spin-offs for the socioeconomic development. The use of
chemical further leads to development in field of research and development. This chapter describes
about benefits of the project on improvements in the physical infrastructure, social infrastructure and
employment potential in the region.
8.2 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY
M/S. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED has decided to use Rs. 70 Lacks in below mentioned sector
under the CER scheme:-
TABLE 8.1 - CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY
CER ACTIVITIES WILL BE CARRIED OUT FOR 5 Years
FY FY FY FY FY
Sr. Activities Name of the Village / Total
2020 - 2021 2022 2023 2024
No. Place (Lakh)
21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25
Installation and
1 maintenance of Solar 12 2 2 2 2 20
Street Light
2 Installation of RO plant Vicinity Villages 20 3 3 2 2 30

(Kosamadi, Bhadi ,
Bhadkodra)
16 1 1 1 1 20
3 Rain water harvesting plan
48 6 6 5 5 70
Total

total 2425 MT/Month
CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY (CER)

The proposed expansion project will increase direct/indirect employment opportunity for surrounding area
local residents. Industry is also committed to make contribution to other social/cultural activities to be
conducted in the area. Industry is committed to participate in various developmental activities including
community welfare programme for overall improvement of the socio-economic environment in the project
area through its effective Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) / Enterprise Social Commitment
(ESC) programme.
Company has allocated fund/ budget of Rs. 70 lakhs (approximately 2 % of the total proposed project
cost) for activities under Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) as per MoEFCC- Office
Memorandum (OM) dated 1st May 2018. The proposed financial and social benefits with special
emphasis on the benefit to the local people under CER programme are summarized under Table 8.1.
The group is also carrying out need based CSR activity at different location.
CSR ACTIVITIES CARRIED OUT BY MEGHMANI GROUP OF YEAR 2019-2020
1. Donated Rs. 35 Lakh to Jayben Modi Hospital, Ankleshwar for Set up of Burn Ward. Also Full-
fledged ambulance is provided.
2. Planned for Entrance Gate at Dahej Village at the Cost of Rs. 40 Lakh
3. Donated Rs. 05 Lakh to AsmitaVikas Kendra at Bharuch for the treatment of mentally impaired
children.
4. We are one of the founder members of Dr.Jivraj Mehta Hospital, Ahmedabad. Recently, we
donated Rs. 75 Lakh to Dr. Jivraj Mehta Hospital to set up Blood Bank facilities.
5. Donated Rs. 11 Lakh recently to promote Sanskrut language and spreading of traditional Vedic
knowledge, a Sanskrut Pathshala, at the banks of Narmada River.
6. Donated Rs. 11 Lakh into the PM Relief Fund as the appeal by our PM for the welfare of widows
of martyred soldiers.
7. To encourage higher education to the weaker section of students at Vadodara City, a Hostel is
constructed at M.S. University Campus with our help of Rs. 22 Lakh.
8. At Panoli, Bharuch, Four School Rooms have been constructed.
9. At our Umiyadham Campus, about 1500 student girls from rural background are availing our
hostel & free food facilities.
10. At Ahmedabad S.G. Highway outskirt SardarDham Hostel facilities is created for rural
background students to study at various colleges at Ahmedabad.

total 2425 MT/Month
11. Donated Rs. 25 Lakh to Gujarat Cancer Society recently. This donation is part of our annual CSR
activities.
12. Rs. 11 Lakh has been donated to the charitable trust hospital of Ankleshwar.
13. Blood donation camps are our routine activities at Dahej, Bharuch & at various locations.
14. Red Cross has provided us many certificates for our regularly on-going blood donation camp
activities.
15. At Dahej for Salt Workers, regular medical check-up camps are being organized.
16. Dahej Govt. school students are being provided textbooks & uniforms regularly.
17. For Improvement of Human Index, we have initiated concept of PPP Scheme under PPP Scheme
of Govt. of Gujarat by taking the responsibility for some years for the development of Civil
Hospital and ITI at Viramgam, Gujarat.
18. We have started arranging Talk Show (open to all), wherein prominent speakers share their
thoughts. Subject spread in National, Social, Spiritual, and Cultural.
19. Recently we provided Uniform, Shoes to the Students and Benches, Blackboards to the school at
Shri. Swaminarayan Secondary School and Meghmani Higher Secondary School. This school is
located in one of the remote place like Viramgam, Ahmedabad. Total donation is Rs. 23 Lakh.
20. Our organisation believes in helping the people of our Society. During the COVID-19, as
Corporate Social Responsibility, total Rs. 22 Lakh has been donated by Meghmani Organics Ltd.
to the Chief Minister Relief Fund (Gujarat) (Rs. 11 Lakh has been deposited to the Collector
Ahmedabad and Rs.11 Lakh to the Collector, Bharuch).
21. During the COVID-19, Meghmani has Distribute food (Rasan Kits) to the lockdown affected
people at Ahmedabad and Bharuch region.
22. As part of Corporate Social Responsibility, during COVID-19, we offered many institutes for free
supply of hand sanitizer, one of our products.
8.3 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
This project will increase the economic activities around the area, creating avenues for direct/ indirect
employment during operation phase of the project. There would be a wider economic impact in terms of
generating opportunities for other business like works hops, marketing, repair and maintenance tasks
etc.
 The continuous inflow of people will require local transport systems like autos, taxis etc which would
help economic boost.

total 2425 MT/Month

CHAPTER 9
ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Table of Contents
9.ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

1
total 2425 MT/Month
CHAPTER -9 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS
9.1 INTRODUCTION
This analysis is not carried out in this study since it is not recommended in the scoping stage as well as
not specified in additional TOR No: IA- J- 11011/194/2020-IA-II(I). Project proponent considered all the
required environmental costs for the project to ensure commitment proposed in the Environment
management plant are made.
Cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is an analytical way for society to make decisions about complicated issues
such as education, health care, transportation, or the environment. Like most personal decisions, it
involves a comparison of the costs of an action compared with considerations of the benefits of that
action. However, for public policy it is formalized and quantitative. For instance, a public policy can be
evaluated by calculating and weighing the benefits against the costs, once all factors have been given a
common unit of measurement. When policymakers have to choose among various alternatives, they
require a tool that will allow them to distinguish between the options. Decision makers can then choose
the policy with the largest surplus, or overall net benefits.
Also, as per CER initiative we can see that the unit is going to contribute 2% (i.e. 70 Lakhs) of the project
cost towards betterment of society in nearby villages in 10 KM vicinity area.
However the unit will explore further possibility after commencement of project and will carry out detailed
environmental cost benefit analysis.

CHAPTER 10
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Table of Contents
10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.2 Aim And Objective 232
10.3 Environment, Health And Safety (EHS) 233
10.4 Environmental Management Plan 233
10.4.1 Construction Phase 234
10.4.2 Operational Phase 235
10.4.6.1 Raw Material & Product Storage Area 237
10.4.7 Green Belt Development 237
10.4.8 Vehicular Pollution Control 238
10.4.9 Safety Measures To Prevent The Occupational Health 239
Hazards
10.4.10 Rain Water Harvesting Scheme 240
10.4.11 Storm Water Management 240
10.5 Additional Mitigation Measures 240
10.5.1 Energy Conservation Programme 241
10.5.2 Water Conservation Programme 242
10.5.3 Management Of Traffic 242
10.5.4 Safety Measures To Prevent The Occupational Health 243
Hazards
10.5.5 Social Welfare Measures For Future Planning 243
10.6 Leak Detection And Repair (Ldar) Program 244
10.7 Findings 251
10.8 Conclusion 252
Table of Tables
10.1 Control Measures For Construction Phase 234

10.2 Details Of Control Measures For Noise Pollution 236
10.3 Budget For Greenbelt Development 237
10.4 Machinery For Solvent Recovery System 247
CHAPTER – 10 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 INTRODUCTION
Environmental protection is an issue that no organization can neglect and hope to survive. The key to
the success of the integrated approach to pollution prevention and control is the management and
operation of the organization. Effective committed management delivers a successful industry. A total
commitment to the environment, not just for compliance with legal or regulatory compliance will be the
essence of environment management of an industry. Many companies have recognized the benefits of
implementing an effective environmental management system.
10.2 AIM AND OBJECTIVE
The aim of environment management plan is to conserve natural resources and water, to prevent
pollution of environment, to ensure effectiveness of control measures and monitoring program, to
ensure safety, welfare and good health of worker, to minimize generation of waste.
The objectives of EMP are as under:
 Pollution will be prevented or reduced at the source,
 Pollution that cannot be prevented will be recycled in to the system,
 Pollution that cannot be prevented or recycled will be subjected for recovery of chemicals using
best technologies,
 Pollution that cannot be prevented or recycled or recovered will be treated in environmentally
safe manner, and
 Disposal and other releases into the environment will be used “only as a last resort” and will be
conducted in an environmentally safe manner.
This report is also made in the overall frame work of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
Notification dated 14th September 2006 (and subsequent amendments to the same) issued by the
Ministry of Environment and Forests& Climate Change (MoEF& CC), by providing required information
with regards to the project as mentioned in the Terms of Reference issued by the MoEF & CC, Delhi.

10.3 ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH AND SAFETY (EHS)

It is of utmost concern for a company to conduct its business in a manner that will promote the
protection of the occupational Health & Safety; Welfare of its employees and others involved in or
affected by its business operations and address the environmental concerns regarding sustainable
development.
To be a responsive and responsible corporate citizen, we shall strive to achieve an organizational
culture of safety, health and environmental excellence.
As an integral part of the company’s business performance, the company shall declare full
commitment to achieve high levels of performance in Health, Safety and Environment.
10.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
An Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is prepared to mitigate and manage various
environmental impacts identified. The EMP presents the project specific guidelines on: Environmental
management strategies.
Specialized engineering construction procedures in relation to environmental guidelines of the country.
 Spill prevention and control
 Management of wastes and hazardous chemicals
 Air, water and soil quality protection
 Noise control
 Soil erosion control and slope stabilization
 Vegetation, wildlife and habitat protection
 Socio-economic and welfare considerations
 Risk and disaster management plan
 To prepare a checklist for statutory compliance
Due to its complexity and implications, the implementation of the EMP must be executed utilizing a
specific EMS framework. Once an EMP has been approved, it should provide the basis for
environmental considerations of all the activities carried out on the site by the appointed personnel.
With respect to the various environmental impacts identified during the EIA stage, mitigation measures
to prevent or minimize the impacts are suggested for all the environmental components.
The environmental management plan for the proposed project aims to mitigate the potentially
detrimental impacts on the environment, both during construction and operation phases of the project.
It is also necessary that continued compliance with existing environmental regulations is ensured. The
construction and associated activities have been planned so as to minimize impacts on the physical,

biological and socio-economic-cultural environments. Even though it would be naive to expect that all
detrimental impacts can be avoided, it is apparent that most of the impacts will be localized and
temporary in nature.
This is a new synthetic organic manufacturing unit in Panoli. Environmental impacts during the
construction phase can be attributed to the site preparation, excavation of trenches, erection &
mechanical fabrication, construction activities, transportation etc. and provision of civic amenities to
the construction workforce. The potential for environmental impact during construction phase on most
of the environmental components are temporary and the environment returns back to its previous
status on completion of the construction. State of the art technology will be adopted for control of
pollution during project execution phase, whenever and wherever applicable.
All construction activities generally cause disruptions to the pre project environmental quality. The
following environmental protection measures should be incorporated as part of terms and conditions of
contract for implementation by the contractor or the authority as appropriate. Recommendations made
to minimize impacts during construction phase are delineated below:
10.4.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
M/s. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED is an existing facility at plot no: - 20, 21, 21/1, GIDC Estate,
Phase-IV, Panoli, District: Bharuch, Gujarat., Unit is applying for EC application to manufacture of
organic pigments. However M/s. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED will ensure to keep the pollution
potential level in the construction phase to a minimum. The task will be assigned to security people
and supervised by qualified supervisor. The control measures proposed by the unit to minimize the
pollution during construction phase are as under Table no.10.1.
TABLE: 10.1
CONTROL MEASURES FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Sr. Source Waste type/ Control measures
No. Pollution
(A) Site Preparation
1. Uplift of dust during the Dust Sprinkling of water over land, and provision of
excavation, leveling enclosure.
operations etc.
(B)Sanitation
1. Sanitation facilities. Sewage Sewage will be sent to Soak pit.
(C)Noise
1. Movement of vehicles like Noise Restrict movement of vehicle between 10 p.m.
truck, Dozer, Cranes pollution to 6 a.m.
All vehicles will be maintained in well condition.
2. Construction activity Noise Engineering control, Provide noise protection
pollution devices like earmuffs, ear plug to worker,


No. Pollution
Rotation of work to minimize exposure.
(D) Wastes from construction equipment
1. Dozer, Cranes Waste oil Avoid spillage, proper storage, disposal by
selling to reprocessor.
2. Painting Empty Proper storage, disposal by selling to authorized
containers buyers/incineration.
of paints
and oils
3. Construction Constructio Use for leveling purpose within premises
n waste
10.4.2 OPERATIONAL PHASE
M/s. MEGHMANI ORGANICS LIMITED is an existing settling facility at plot no: - 20, 21, 21/1, GIDC
Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli, District: Bharuch, Gujarat. Unit will be manufacturing Organic Synthetic
products & Some are inorganic Chemicals on this unit.

Flue Gas Emission:
There is existing flue gas emission from 2 nos of Boiler having capacity of (5 TPH), Thermic fluid
heater-1 & 2 having capacity of (20 Kcal/Hr) and another Thermic fluid heater-3 & 4 having (20
Kcal/Hr) based on coal and 2 nos. of CPP based on natural gas.
After proposed expansion flue gas emission from one Boiler-1 (8 TPH) & another Boiler-1 having
capacity of (10 TPH), 2 nos. of Thermic flue heaters having (20 lakhs Kcal/hr. each) and DG set of one
500 KVA.DG set and another is (1000 KVA) will be use as standby mode.
Process Gas Emission:
There will be a process gas emission of Ammonia, Cl2, HCl, SPM, gas. However to curb the process
gas emission, unit will install water Air Pollution Control Measures.
Fugitive Emission:
There will be fugitive emission of VOC during material handling, transferring and at storage area.
The control measures of flue gas emission and process emission are as under.
Total water requirement of the unit will be the source of water is GIDC water supply system. Unit will
use total 2710 KLD water. Fresh water: - 2460 KLD Fresh + 140 KLD MEE condensate + 110 KLD
Internal Recycled). The water consumption for the domestic purpose will be 90 KLD & for the
gardening purpose will be 100 KLD. Water conservation measures will be taken to explore possibility

of reuse/recycle of water. Process optimization, reduction, reuse and recycle of water will be carried
out to minimize the impact. Record of water consumption will be maintained.
Pumps and reactors will be having mechanical seal, so there will be no leakages. The unit will provide
connection system for possibility of leakages. Leakages will be collected in a small pit which will carry
the leakages to effluent plant. Possible spillages will be from vessel washing, transfer of liquids, to
avoid the spillage fixed pipeline will be provided. Vessel washing will be collected to effluent treatment
plant. The unit will provide dedicated area made with RCC and HDPE lining so that the washing can
be directly sent to ETP plant.
The sources of noise generation will be transportation activities, D.G. set, cooling tower, plant
machinery etc. The unit will take following measures to control noise pollution.
TABLE: 10.2
DETAILS OF CONTROL MEASURES FOR NOISE POLLUTION
No. pollution
1. Transportation Noise  Green belt, Restriction on transportation between 08 p.m. to 9

activities pollution a.m., Maintain vehicle in good condition.
2. D.G.set Noise  Acoustic enclose, Engineering control,
pollution  Provision of PPE, Green belt,
3. Plant/process Noise  Maintain equipment & machines in good working condition.
area pollution  Isolated noisy area from other area by distance and if it is not
possible than by physical separation or noise proof valve.
 Provide silencer to safety valve, relief valve
 Provision of PPE, Green belt,
 Record noise level monitoring of different places within and
outside premises, Periodically Audio metric test,
 Rotation of work to minimize exposure.

The management plan for this component of environment lays emphasis on development of greenbelt
comprising of appropriately selected species of shrubs and trees. It is recommended that plantation be
made on sites, road sides, around waste treatment units. Such a development of greenbelt and
plantation of shrubs and trees will not only significantly reduce or mitigate adverse impacts due to
aerosols and gaseous pollutants, noise, odour and nuisance etc., but also serve as shelter belts for
avifauna, stabilize and improve soil permeability and aesthetic environment.
10.4.6.1 RAW MATERIAL & PRODUCT STORAGE AREA

The unit will take following control measures to prevent land contamination from raw material storage
and handling.
 Raw materials will be stored in M.S tanks, HDPE Carboys, HDPE bags, etc in separate storage
room.
 Separate collection system is provided for collection of spillage material. Impervious layer, RCC
roads and flooring is provided to area, where the chemical storage and handling activities is involved.
 Hazardous flammable substances are separately stored within premises. Solvent transfer will be
done by pumps. Reactor & solvent handling pump have mechanical seal.
 The acid tanks will be provided with dyke wall to control spread of leakages.
10.4.7GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT
The main objective of green belt is to provide a barrier between source of pollution and surrounding
area by filtering the air particulate and interacting with gaseous pollutants before it reaches to the
ground.The unit will plant trees like Babool (Vachellianilotica), Peepal (Ficusreligiosa), Neem
(Azadirachtaindica), Asopalav (Polyalthialongifolia), Banyan, Kapok (Ceibapentandra), Nilgiri
(Eucalyptus), Gulmohar (Delonixregia), Pelta Farm, Kashid.
TABLE 10.3
BUDGET FOR GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT
PLANTATION WITHIN THE PREMISES

Plantation Required In Area 39600 Sq meter (40% of total plot area- 99002
Sq.mt)
Existing Green Belt Area 31096 Sq meter (32% of total plot area)
Proposed additional green belt area 8504 Sq meter (8% of total plot area) (Outside
Premises)
Amount (INR) to develop green additional 10 Lacks
green belt area

Preparation of Greenbelt Plan

The proposed greenbelt development should be of a suitable width along the periphery of project site
area including unit complex, space between the units located within the project, along the roads,
storage areas, loading / unloading areas of products etc.
Criteria for Selection of Species for Greenbelt
The plant species suitable for green belt development should be selected based on characteristics.
 It should have thick canopy cover
 They should be perennial and evergreen
 They should have high sink potential for pollutants
 They should be efficient in absorbing pollutants if any without significantly affecting their growth.
Guidelines for Plantation

The plant species identified for greenbelt development should be planted using pitting technique. The
pit size should be either 45 cm × 45 cm × 45 cm or 60 cm × 60 cm ×60 cm. bigger pit size is prepared
on marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling the pit should be mixed with well decomposed
farm yard manure for 45cm ×45 cm × 45 cm and 60 cm × 60 cm × 60 cm size pits respectively. The
filling of soil should be completed at least 5-10 days before actual plantation. Healthy sapling of
identified species should be planted in each pit.
Roadside Plantation
Roadside plantation plays a very important role for greening the area, increasing the shady area,
increasing aesthetic value and for eco-development of the area. The approach roads to project site will
be planted with flowering trees. Trees should be planted to increase aesthetic value as well as shady
area along the roads.
Each plant shows different air pollution tolerance level depending upon number of factors. The trees
should be tolerant to air pollutants present in the area & should be able to grow and thrive on soil of
the area, be evergreen, inhabitant, having minimum of leaf fall. The trees should be tall in peripheral
curtain plantation and with large and spreading canopy in primary and secondary attenuation zone. It
is also recommended to plant few trees, which are sensitive to air pollution as air pollution indicator.
10.4.8VEHICULAR POLLUTION CONTROL
 All vehicles will be maintained in well condition by regular preventive maintenance to reduce the
exhaust level.

 Drivers of all vehicles used in the transportation will be trained in transportation of Hazardous
chemicals to prevent any accident. Fitness and training test certificate approved by R.T.O to be
maintained on the vehicle at all times to ensure transport worthiness.
10.4.9SAFETY MEASURES TO PREVENT THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS
 All reasonably practical measures will be adopted by the unit to minimize the risk of accidents
within a chemical manufacturing unit
 All building plans and installations will be as per relevant laws and approved by competent
authority
 Training is imparted to all workers for all the hazardous process operations within the plant and will
be supervised by experienced supervisors
 Suitable personnel protective equipment and fire extinguishers at strategic locations and suitable
personal protective equipment will be provided
 Flame proof electrical fittings, flame arrestors etc will be installed
 All the raw materials & solvents will be stored in designated storage area equipped with necessary
safety features.
 The solvent storage area will be restricted for unauthorized persons. Proper earthling will be
provided in all electrical equipment whenever solvent handling is done. Flame arrester cum
breather valve and flame proof fitting will be provided at tank farm.
 Periodic inspection & testing of pressure vessels, equipment, and machineries will be done.
 Good housekeeping will be ensured within the factory premises.
 All designated staff & workers will be trained for the firefighting, work permit system, first aid and
safe handballing of hazardous chemicals.
 Incident/accident reporting system will be developed and all the employees are made aware for
the same.
 Suitable notices/boards will be displayed at designated locations indicating appropriate hazard
warnings.
 Antidotes as well as MSDS for all the chemicals will be made available within the factory premises.
 Pre-employment medical checkup at the time of employment will be carried out. In order to safe
guard the health of the employees, all the employees undergo periodic health checkup at every six
month.

10.4.10 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SCHEME

Rainwater harvesting is a mechanism involved in collecting, storing and using rainwater when it is
most needed. A rainwater harvesting system comprises of various stages – transporting rain water
through pipes or drains, filtration, and storage in tanks for reuse or recharge. There are five
components in a rainwater harvesting system namely catchment, conveyance, filtration, storage and
recharge.
Advantages of Rain Water Harvesting
There are various advantages of Rain Water recharging from which some of those are listed below:
 Prevent evaporation and runoff of rain water and convey it to recharge groundwater especially in
such areas where runoff is very high.
 Solution to water scarcity problems.
 Effective rise in ground water levels.
 It’s economical and energy saving as it prevents extraction of water from depleting ground water
table.
 Easy operation and maintenance.
Design of Rain Water Harvesting
 Quantity of Rain water collected depends upon:
 (a) Average rainfall intensity (b) Catchment area (c) Run-off coefficient.
 The rain water from the Roof tops, Paved and Green Area will be collected through PVC pipes and
then transferred to the proposed rainwater harvesting pits. Design calculations for these pits are
discussed in subsequent section.
 Based on the long term IMD Data for Bharuch District
 Annual Rainfall intensity = 1165 mm (1.165 m)
 It will be collected in intermediate tank and stored in raw water tank for further usage.
10.4.11STORM WATER MANAGEMENT
 The drains for storm water will be kept clean and dry in summer and winter. The storm water
drains will be connected to holding tank. The rain water of the premises will be collected in this
holding tank through storm water drains. The collected water will be analyzed for any
contamination of pollutants for 1st and 2nd rain during monsoon. If analysis indicates any
contamination, the collected water will be diverted to ETP plant. In case of no contamination, the
collected water will be used in cooling tower and other applications.
10.5 ADDITIONAL MITIGATION MEASURES

In addition to the above suggested measures for management of air, water, soil, etc following
additional measures shall be provided.
10.5.1 ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMME
Energy conservation measures are often the easiest, quickest and cheapest way to reduce costs and
be environmentally pro-active. Energy conservation will be one of the focuses during planning and
operation stages. The conservation efforts would consist of the following:
a. Architectural design
 Public areas will be cooled by natural ventilation as opposed to air-conditioning.

 Maximize the use of natural lighting through design.
b. Energy Saving Practices
 Purchase of energy efficient appliances.
 Reducing energy consumption by installing Solar Panel in administrative office in near future.
 Constant monitoring of energy consumption and defining targets for energy conservation.
 Adjusting the settings and illumination levels to ensure minimum energy used for desired
comfort levels.
 Economizers will be provided to utilize heat.
 Condensate will be recovered and will send back to boiler.
 Proper temperature controls will be provided to reduce load on heating systems.
 Proper load factor will be maintained by the company.
 Company will adopt good maintenance practices and will maintain good housekeeping which
will help in better illumination levels with least number of fixtures.
 On most of roofs transparent acrylic sheets will be provided to use day light and to stop use of
lights during day time.
 LED lamps will be provided.
 To the extent possible and technically feasible, energy efficient equipment will be selected.
 Gravity flow will be preferred wherever possible to save pumping energy.
 Recycling of condensate water will be done.
 Variable frequency drive motors will be used. Energy efficient motors will be used.
c. Behavioral change on consumption
 Awareness on energy conservation.
 Training to staffs on methods of energy conservation.

10.5.2 WATER CONSERVATION PROGRAMME

Unit will reuse 250 KLD recycled water. However, water conservation shall be practiced to the extent
possible by use of reclaimed water for all non-potable application like gardening, lawns an, flushing
toilets etc.
(I) Minimizing Water Consumption
A combination of water saving appliances and water management measures will be planned in the
plant. The message of water conservation shall be spread to all occupiers on site by way of
awareness campaigns and circulars. Specific measures that will be implemented include the following:
(II) Management Measures
 Reduce toilet cistern volume in single flush models.
 Promote awareness on water conservation and reducing water wastage.
 Quick fixing of leaking taps pipes and toilet cisterns; Sweep with a broom and pan where
possible, rather than hose down external areas.
Minimize water use in gardens by the following measures:
 Drip irrigation system shall be used for the lawns and other green area which can save water
between 15-40% of the water use, compared with other watering techniques.
 Plants with similar water requirements shall be grouped on common zones to match
precipitation heads and emitters.
 Use of low-volume, low-angle sprinklers for lawn areas.
 Select controllers with adjustable watering schedules and moisture sensors to account for
seasonal variations and calibrate them during commissioning.
 Selecting a drought resistant grass.
(III) Water Saving Investments
 Reduce water delivery in taps and showers, through the installation of low flow devices or
aerators on showerheads.
 Spring-loaded taps;
 Installation of sub-meters on key areas of water use – monitoring water use is a precursor for
management and Water Efficient Plumbing Fixtures
10.5.3 MANAGEMENT OF TRAFFIC
Parking space for vehicles will be provided for loading and unloading products. Adequate roads to
cater to two way traffic and to meet the fire regulations are planned in the complex.
 One gate for entry and exit will be provided with 7m wide approach roads.
 Convex mirror placed along all critical points for visibility.

 Adequate Ramp Feeds will be provided.

 Zebra crossings shall be provided on the existing road for pedestrian access.
 Entry and exit shall be managed by security personnel who will also regulate traffic.
 Thus the traffic management will be easily and smoothly monitored without any hindrances to the
regular flow of traffic on the main road.
10.5.4 SAFETY MEASURES TO PREVENT THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS
 All reasonably practical measures will be adopted by the unit to minimize the risk of accidents
within a chemical manufacturing unit.
 All building plans and installations will be as per relevant laws and will be approved by competent
authority
 Training will be imparted to all workers for all the hazardous process operations within the plant
and will be supervised by experienced supervisors
 Suitable personnel protective equipment and fire extinguishers at strategic locations and suitable
personal protective equipment will be provided
 Flame proof electrical fittings, flame arrestors etc will be installed
 All the raw materials will be stored in designated storage area equipped with necessary safety
features
 Periodic inspection & testing of pressure vessels, equipment, and machineries will be done.
 Good housekeeping will be ensured within the factory premises
 All designated staff & workers will be trained for the fire-fighting, work permit system, first aid and
safe handballing of hazardous chemicals.
 Incident/accident reporting system will be developed and all the employees will be made aware for
the same.
 Suitable notices/boards will be displayed at designated locations indicating appropriate hazard
warnings.
 Antidotes as well as MSDS for all the chemicals will be made available within the factory premises.
 Pre-employment medical checkup at the time of employment will be carried out. In order to safe
guard the health of the employees, all the employees undergo periodic health checkup at every six
month.
10.5.5 SOCIAL WELFARE MEASURES FOR FUTURE PLANNING
Providing materials and monetary aid to schools, primary health centers, hospitals, sports, clubs and
places of worship.

 Planning to create residential, medical, educational and recreational facilities for our employees.
 Rural Development Programmers for up liftmen of people in the form of dead diction, self-help,
vocational training and guidance etc.
 Contributed in any welfare society.
 Scholarship for girls in Schools.
 Training local unprivileged boys and girls for Housekeeping, Laundry etc and provide employment.
 Adoption of Local School / Slum for up liftmen of locals.
10.5.6 LEAK DETECTION AND REPAIR (LDAR) PROGRAM
SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM WITH SCRUBBER TO CONTROL VOC
SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM OF MCB (CPC GREEN-7)
Mono Chloro Benzene is the solvent to be used in the Copper Phthalo cyanine Green-7. Solvent will
be recovered under closed system.
For the manufacturing of Copper Phthalo cyanine Green-7, Chloro Benzene is used as a solvent. As
Solvent MCB will create a zeotrope with water, it will come along with water from distillation vessel.
Chloro Benzene is high boiling point solvent and insoluble with water hence after condensation water
and Chloro Benzene will be getting separately in vessel. Approximately, unit will recover 98.5%
solvent. Remaining solvent will be going along with effluent. There is no VOC escape of solvent in the
atmosphere.

SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR MONO CHLORO BENZENE
SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR IBA/XYLENE/MEK

IBA/Xylen/MEK is the solvent to be used in the Pthalocyanine Beta Blue process. Solvent will be
recovered under closed system.
Isobutyl alcohol/xylene/MEK is the solvent to be used in beta blue manufacturing process.
Solvent recovery plant is designed to recover the IBA/Xylene from the mother liquor. Plant will work
efficiently with approx 96 to 97 % recovery.
Recovered IBA/Xylene/MEK will be reused in next batch. There will no loss in the atmosphere.
The 2 to 3 % solvent remains with waste water and finds its way in the effluent.

DETAILS OF SOLVENT RECOVERY FOR DCT/ONT

The solvents are recovered through Rotary Vacuum Dryer (RVD) followed by two stage heat
exchangers. Cooling tower water is circulated in primary heat exchanger and in secondary heat
exchanger cooling water circulation is circulated. The figure of scrubber system is given below as
figure.

TABLE 10.4
MACHINERY FOR SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM
Sr. No. Name of Units
1. Rotary Vacuum Dryer
2 Condenser – 2 Nos
3. Receiver

total 2425 MT/Month
LEAK DETECTION AND REPAIR (LDAR) PROGRAM

Monitoring of Solvent Losses:
• Leak Detection and Repair (LDAR) program is proposed to be implemented to comply with
environmental regulations for reducing the fugitive emissions of targeted chemicals into the
environment. Leaking equipment, such as valves, pumps, and connectors, are probable source of
emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and volatile hazardous air pollutants (VHAPs).
• Periodic monitoring of work area will be carried out to check the fugitive emission.
• VOC detectors will be installed at various places to detect leak.
It is proposed that the site shall implement the LDAR and monitoring protocol as per Clause 7.6.2
of CPCB Guideline. The details of the same are as follows:
1. Source Identification
Leak detection and repair (LDAR) program includes following sources:
(i) Block valves;
(ii) Control valves;
(iii) Pump seals;
(iv) Compressor seals;
(v) Pressure relief valves;
(vi) Flanges – Heat Exchangers;
(vii) Flanges – Piping;
(viii) Connectors – Piping;
(ix) Open ended lines; and
(x) Sampling connections.
To Prevent Losses in Atmosphere
 Leak Free Pumps for transfer like Magnetic coupled pumps

 MSW (Metal Slice Wreath) Gaskets in pipelines to prevent leakage from flanges.
 Condenser and Reactor with cooling arrangement.

total 2425 MT/Month
MITIGATION MEASURE TO AVOID LOSSESIN PRODUCTION ACTIVITY
Sr. Solvent Source % Loss Mitigation Measure

No.
1. Solvent going along with 2% We will provide mechanical
IBA/Xylene/MEK products. seal pumps, and our
solvent handling will be
through close loop system.
For mentioned solvents, we
estimate to recover 98.5%
solvent. 1.5% solvents will
be going along with product
which will be removed
through filtration and
washing.
 * We may inform you that our all solvents are high boiling point solvents. We will also undertake lots of
effort to minimize the solvent losses. We will provide mechanically seal pump. We will recover solvents
through close loop. We will also remove unnecessary mechanical parts from the system.
2. Equipment Components and proposed frequency
Following frequency of monitoring of leaks and schedule for repair of leaks shall be followed:
Sr. Component Frequency of repair Schedule
No monitoring
1 Valves/Flanges Quarterly (semi-annual Repair will be started within 5
after two consecutive working days and shall be
periods with < 2% leaks completed within 15 working days
and annual after 5 after detection of leak for general
periods
hydrocarbons. In case of benzene,
with < 2% leaks)
the leak shall be attended
2 Pump Seal Quarterly

total 2425 MT/Month
3 Compressor Seal Quarterly immediately for repair.
4 Pressure relief Quarterly

devices
5 Pressure relief Within 24 hours
devices (after
venting)
6 Heat Exchangers Quarterly
7 Process drains Annually
8 Components that Annually
are difficult to
monitor
9 Pump seals with Weekly Immediately
visible liquid
dripping
10 Any component Weekly
with visible leaks
11 Any component Within a week -
after repair/
replacement
3. Type of monitoring methods

Following types of monitoring methods are proposed to be judiciously employed for detection of
leaks:
(i) Photo ionization detector (PID) or flame ionization detector (FID) Instrumental method
of measurement of leaks;
(ii) Audio, visual and olfactory (AVO) leak detection;
(iii) Soap bubble method.
4. Engineering Recommendations to reduce VOCs.

total 2425 MT/Month
 Data on time of measurement & concentration value for leak detection; time of repair of leak; and
time of measurement & concentration value after repair of leak to be documented for all the
components.
 Pressure relief and blow down systems will be designed such that it will discharge to a vapor
collection and recovery system or to flare.
 Open-ended lines will be closed by a blind flange or plugged.
 Totally closed-loop will be used in all routine samples.
 Low emission packing will be used for valves.

 High integrity sealing materials will be used for flanges.
 Specific type of valves, flanges, pumps, glands and gasket will be chosen considering the service
and compatibility considering minimum emissions.
 No open handling of solvents will be carried out. Solvents will be charged by vacuum.
 All process drains, LPDs, HPVs will be plugged.
 Engineering Design guidelines will be followed to reduce emissions.
 Unnecessary evaporation of solvents will be avoided by using vacuum process at low
temperature wherever possible.
 Open storage of drums (under direct sunlight) will be avoided.
5. How to avoid transportation loss

 We will adopt close loop system.
 We will use mechanical seal pumps.
10.7 FINDINGS
From the foregoing sections it is clear that environmental considerations are foremost during
development of the project, at all the following levels:
(1) Project sitting (2) Planning and design (3)Project construction (4) Post project operations
The following findings are to be mentioned:
 The Project will have no significant environmental impacts during construction and operations.
 Project risks will be minimized through rigorous enforcement of national design and operational
standards.

total 2425 MT/Month
 The environmental and safety aspects of the Project are straightforward and well understood.
 A detailed environmental impact study is carried out and EMP. No further studies are required to
elaborate these subjects.
The EMP also provides for establishing, and maintaining a system of environmental monitoring and
auditing to ensure strict compliance of all the measures identified in the EMP, and minimize adverse
environmental and social impacts.
10.8 CONCLUSION
The project can cause minor impacts only during construction phase due to the various activities involved
during that phase. However, strict adherence to the various mitigation measures as identified under the
EMP, strengthened by adequate environmental monitoring using best available technology (BAT) and
auditing and good construction practices, including the special construction methods as prescribed, will
go a long way in effectively reducing the impacts as to negligible levels.
During operation phase of the project, none of the routine activities will cause any noticeable impact on
any component of the environment, including the socio-economic component. Provision of green belt and
energy conservation shall further facilitate in overall scenario management of Environment.
Thus, it can be concluded on a positive note that after the implementation of the mitigation measures and
Environmental Management Plan, the proposed project shall have negligible impact on environment and
will benefit the local people and economy.

CHAPTER – 11
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

Table of Contents
11.EXECUTIVE SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

11.1.1 Location 253
11.1.2 Investment 253
11.1.3 Infrastructure Facilities 253
11.2 Project Description 253
11.2.1 Need For The Project 253
11.2.2 Production And Raw Material 253
11.2.3 Resource Requirement 253
11.2.4 Pollution Potential Scenario 254
11.3 Baseline Environment Status 255
11.3.1 Study Area Included In Environmental Setting 255
11.3.2 Climate Of The Study Area 255
11.3.3 Ambient Air Quality 255
11.3.4 Water Quality 255
11.3.6 Soil Environment 256
11.3.7 Land Use Of The Study Area 256
11.3.8 Biological Environment 256
11.4 Identification &Assessmentof Impact 256
11.4.5 Ecological Environment 257
11.4.6 Socio-Economic Impact 257
11.4.7 Infra Structure And Services 258
11.5 Environment Monitoring Program 258
11.6 Risk Assessment And Disaster Management Plan 258
11.7 Project Benefits 258
11.8 Environmental Management Plan 258
11.8.1 Environment Management Cell 258
11.8.2 Environmental Management Plan For Unit 258
11.8.2.1 Environment Management Plan For Construction Phase 258
11.8.2.2 Environment Management Plan For Operational Phase 259
11.9 Health & Safety 260
11.10 Conclusion 260
Error! Bookmark not defined.

CHAPTER-11 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY & CONCLUSION
11.1 INTRODUCTION
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at plot no: - 20, 21, 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli,
and District: Bharuch, Gujarat. Unit has proposed to manufacture Synthetic Organic Chemicals. Unit
is applying EC for manufacturing of 2425 MT/Month of Organic Chemicals & 3560 MT/Month of
Inorganic products.
11.1.1 LOCATION
M/s. Meghmani Organics Limited is located at plot no: - 20, 21, 21/1, GIDC Estate, Phase-IV, Panoli,
and District: Bharuch, Gujarat.
11.1.2 INVESTMENT
The total investment for proposed project will be in plant and machinery, building and environment
protection and safety. The cost of proposed new project will be Rs. 35.70 Crores.
11.1.3 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES
The plant is located in Panoli, which is well-developed industrial zone. Panoli is having all essential
facilities such as internal roads, arrangement for supply of water and power to industries etc.
11.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
11.2.1 NEED FOR THE PROJECT
Proponents have been engaging in the manufacturing of Synthetic Organic Chemicals. It will be a
dedicated facility catering to exports from India. The product will be supplied to global multinational
company for their growing demand for a supply term of 20 years. Global Customer had evaluated
many suppliers across different countries and has finally decided to partner. This is first step in
building a long term relationship with a Global customer which will set a base for future long term
projects.
11.2.2 PRODUCTION AND RAW MATERIAL
Total production capacity of the unit will be 2425 MT/Month & 3560 MT/Month of Inorganic products.
The unit has proposed manufacturing of synthetic organic chemical as a product.
11.2.3 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT
LAND
The total plot area of the unit is 99002 sq. m. The green belt area will be approx. 33052 sq. m.
WATER REQUIREMENT
will use 2460 KLD fresh water & 250 KLD recycle water.

Total wastewater generation will be 1725 KLD (Domestic: 75 KLD + Industrial: 1650 KLD). Out of
1650 KLD, 250 KLD effluent will be internally recycle & remaining 1585 KLD will be subjected to
primary NCTL- FETP facility.
ENERGY REQUIREMENT
The power requirement for proposed project will be 6000 KVA.
11.2.4 POLLUTION POTENTIAL SCENARIO
WASTE WATER MANAGEMENT

filtrate and clarifier will be sent to M/s. BEIL, Ankleshwar or M/s ENVIRO CARE.
Waste streams generated from spillage, leakages, vessel washing, used container washing etc. will
be collected in tank and send to effluent treatment plant.
discharge effluent to NCTL. NCTL is meeting its discharge norm. So, direction under section 18 (1)
(b) of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act, 1974 issued by CPCB regarding
compliance of CETP is not applicable.
GASEOUS EMISSION
FLUE GAS EMISSION
Existing unit has 2 Nos. of 5 TPH of coal fired boiler installed with APCM of E.S.P. with a stack
height of 40 m will be installed. Additionally 4 number of Thermic Fluid Heater (20 Lac Kcal/Hr) of
Coal fired installed with a stack of height of 30 m.
Proposed unit will be installed 8 TPH & 10 TPH of coal fired boiler installed with APCM of E.S.P. and
Water Scrubber with a stack height of 30 m will be installed. Additionally Two number of Thermic
Fluid Heater (20 Lac Kcal/Hr) of Coal fired installed with a stack of height of 30 m and 2 Nos. of D.G
Set [500 KVA + 1000 KVA] will be installed for Emergency propose .

PROCESS GAS EMISSION

Ammonia, Chlorine, HCl and SPM will be the process gas emissions. The unit will install water
scrubbers and alkali scrubber to curb it.
11.3 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STATUS

11.3.1 STUDY AREA INCLUDED IN ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING
Studies were carried out in about 10 km radial distance from the project site with respect to sampling
and analysis of air quality, water quality, noise level and soil quality. The base line data were
monitored for study period of March-2018 to May-2018.
11.3.2 CLIMATE OF THE STUDY AREA
Relative humidity
The maximum relative humidity reported around 79% and minimum relative humidity is reported
around 4% during period of March-2018 to May-2018.
Temperature
The maximum temperature reported is 420C and the minimum temperature reported is 25OC during
period of March-2018 to May-2018.
Rainfall
There was no rain fall in March-2018 to May-2018.
11.3.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
Based on data obtained, it could be stated that, during the study period the values of PM10 at
monitored locations is ranged between 61-90 µg/m3 while the values PM2.5 fluctuates in the range of
30-46 µg/m3. The values of SO2 and NOx were observed to be in the range of 22-40 µg/m3 and 32-48
µg/m3 respectively. The values of VOC were observed to be in the range of 1.3-3.9 µg/m3 respectively
& the values of CO were observed to be in the range 0.2 - 0.7 mg/m3
The average concentration of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, VOC and CO are within prescribed limit at all
locations.
11.3.4 WATER QUALITY
 Though the area is found to be of rocky terrain but the TDS content of the sample is observed
to be maximum up to 2142 mg/l in Bhadi which is little bit aboveon acceptable limit. Other
village water sample are having TDS below acceptable limit.
Analysis of collected samples reveals that rest of the parameters satisfy the permissible limits as per
IS 10500:2012 specified for drinking water and hence are suitable for drinking, however it is
suggested that the water may disinfected by boiling or by use of chlorine tablets before use.


The noise levels during daytime varied from 47-53 dB (A) Leq to 54-60 dB (A) Leq in the study area.
The noise level in the study area is within the permissible Limits as per Noise rules 2000.
The night time noise level in the study area is in the range of 35-47 dB (A) Leq to 48-52 dB (A) Leq.
The night time noise was also within stipulated standards of CPCB.
11.3.6 SOIL
The composite soil sample was collected from project site and the villages within 10 km radius. The
samples were collected to determine physical and chemical characteristic of soil.
11.3.7 LAND USE OF THE STUDY AREA
As per land use study, major land use of study area of 10 km buffer area is covered by 69.76 % of
Water body, 9.34% of open/barren land, 3.46% of agricultural land, 1.81% of fallow Land, 1.42% of
industrial area, 0.35% of human settlement area.
11.3.8 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT
The study of the environmental components like flora and fauna is required to assess the biological
diversity of the region. Flora and fauna can be used for biological surveillance in assessing the
environmental status. The ecological interpretation is based on secondary sources of information.
Water is the basic and essential resource for the survival of flora and fauna. The flora being the
primary producer influences the fauna of the region. The characteristic flora existing in a region
depends upon the existing conditions such as intensity of sunlight, type of soil, quality of air, including
the quality and quantity of water available, etc.
11.4 IDENTIFICATION &ASSESSMENTOF IMPACT


The unit will provide adequate stack height for Boiler, Hot Air Generator and acoustic enclosure for
one stack connected to DG sets.
Adequate noise control measures such as mufflers, silencers at the air inlet/outlet, anti-vibration pad
for equipment with high vibration etc. shall be provided.Housing/casing shall be provided for all noise
generating machines. Job rotation will reduce exposure to some extent. Moreover, PPE like earmuff
and ear plugs will be provided to the operators/worker exposed to high noise. The proposed green
belt will further be helpful in reducing the ambient noise level.
If the hazardous wastes are not handled properly, it can pose danger of land contamination and can
affect land system adversely. Transportation is one of the most important areas of concern
associated with handling Hazardous Waste, because the packaging and method of transporting of
Hazardous waste will prevent the likelihood that an accident or spill would occur. Separate collection
system will be provided for collection of spillage material. Impervious layer, RCC roads and flooring
will be provided to area, where the chemical storage and handling activities will be involved. Hence,
there will be no significant adverse impact on land environment.
11.4.5 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT
The project site is at a far distance from the forest land, wild life sanctuaries and national parks. There
will be not significant impact on crops & vegetation as the proposed APCM will take care of flue gas
emission and process emission.
11.4.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT
This will be a beneficial impact on the local socio-economic environment as increase in demand for
essential utilities and employment during both construction and operational phase.

11.4.7 INFRA STRUCTURE AND SERVICES

This will be a beneficial impact on the local infrastructure services e.g. roads, post and telegraph,
communication, medical facilities, education, housing will be improved in surrounding area.
11.5 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAM
The unit will carry out quarterly monitoring of ambient air, process emission, fugitive emission, Noise,
waste water and yearly monitoring of hazardous waste by external approved monitoring agency.
Waste water will be monitored daily by in house facility for pH and COD.
11.6 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN
The chapter 7 includes objectives and methodology of risk assessment, details of storage of finish
products and raw materials, details of safety measures, identification of hazards, consequence
analysis, recommendations on the basis of risk assessment done, safety aspects to reduce risk in
storage area and disaster management plan. Consequences analysis covers major five types of
exposures to hazardous effect. Flash fire and explosions, Toxic effect from toxic materials or toxic
combustion product.
11.7 PROJECT BENEFITS
The unit has planned to spend Rs. 70 lakhs for period of five year towards CER activity. There will be
employment opportunity for local people during construction and operation phase. The CER activity
will be carried within 10 km affected villages.
11.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
11.8.1 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL
There shall be EHS department for overseeing all environment and safety responses to ensure the
implementation of EMP mentioned during construction and operation phase including findings /
recommendations of third party audits and monitoring results as mentioned in the EMP.
At least one permanent employee with adequate educational and professional qualification and
experience to discharge responsibilities related to environmental management including statutory
compliance, pollution prevention, environmental monitoring will be employed by company and will
directly report to the Director of the organization operations.
11.8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR UNIT
11.8.2.1 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE
During construction it is necessary to control uplift of dust during the excavation, leveling and
transportation by spraying water over the paths, land and along the temporary roads. The workers
involved in the construction will be provided proper sanitation facilities. The construction workers on
site will be provided with necessary noise protection devices like earmuffs whenever they have to
work near the noise generating equipment/sources.

11.8.2.2 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR OPERATIONAL PHASE

WATER

AIR ENVIRONMENT
The unit will provide adequate stack height for Boiler, Hot Air Generator and acoustic enclosure for
one stack connected to DG sets.
NOISE
Audio metric test should be conducted periodically for employees working close to the high noise
sources. Adequate noise control measures such as mufflers, silencers at the air inlet/outlet, anti-
vibration pad for equipment with high vibration, earmuff and ear plugs to the operators, etc. shall be
provided. Rotation of work will minimize exposure.
LAND
Raw materials will be stored in separate storage area. All the raw effluent storage tanks will be
covered with RCC slab. Separate collection system will be provided for collection of spillage material.

Impervious layer, RCC roads and flooring will be provided to area, where the chemical storage and
handling activities will be involved. The acid tanks are provided with dyke wall to control spread of
leakages.
CLEANER PRODUCTION
 The plant is itself a product of cleaner production technology.
 Continuous loop reactor instead of batch conventional reaction.
Further cleaner production techniques will be carried out after successful trial of plant.
BUDGETARY PROVISION PROPOSED FOR ENVIRONMENT POLLUTION CONTROL
MEASURES
The unit has proposed Rs. 490 Lakhs as capital cost and Rs. 558 Lakhs as recurring cost for
environment pollution control measures.
11.9 HEALTH & SAFETY
There will be provision of PPE, antidotes, periodic inspection & testing of pressure vessels,
equipment, machineries, pre-employment medical checkup, periodic health checkup, training of
firefighting, work permits system, first aid, safe handling of hazardous chemicals and integrating
safety. Hazardous processes will be operated by trained workers and will be looked after by qualified
& experienced supervisors
11.10 CONCLUSION
It can be concluded on positive note that after implementation of proper mitigation measures and
environment management plan this project will have insignificant impact on environment and
economic.

CHAPTER – 12
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

Table of Contents
12.1 COMPANY DETAILS & ORGANIZATION OF COMPANY

12.1.1 Company Profile 261
12.1.2 Service Provide 262
12.2 EIA TEAM MEMBERS 262
Error! Bookmark not defined.
12 Chapter 12 Disclosure of Consultants
.
12.1 Company Details & Organization of Company
12.1.1 COMPANY PROFILE
Green Circle, Inc. is a leading IMS (ISO 9001, 14001 & 45001) & Integrated HSEQR Consulting,
Engineering, Scientists and training organization in the field of Environmental, Safety, Health &
Hygiene, Risk Engineering & Quality Systems.
GCI offers One Stop Solution for all industrial & commercial requirements in the field of
Environment, risk and safety, having Business Operations in India and Abroad.
GCI is committed to deliver the best practical solution to all sectors of business with an aim to
have Pollution Free & Healthy Environment along with Sustainable development.
12.1.2 Service Provide:
M/s. Green Circle, Inc. offers following specialized services in 8 verticals as:
 Risk Management Services (with Fire & Safety)

 Electrical Safety Services
 Industrial Hygiene Services
 Business Management Services
 EIA & Environmental Consulting
 Environmental Laboratory Services
 Training & Seminars
 Engineering Services
12.1.3 Vision Statement
Our Mission
“Our mission is to provide outstanding HSE consulting service with an integrated
strategic and technical approach that delivers excellent, long lasting and
sustainable impact for our clients.”

Our Vision
“To become the leading total sustainable EHS solution provider in the country.”
12.1 EIA Team Members:
The EIA team engaged in the preparation of EIA report consists of professionals with
multidisciplinary skills and experience required for undertaking this project. The EIA involved in
various stages of planning to final report preparation is given below in table:
“I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed this
Report”.
The EIA team engaged in the preparation of EIA report consists of professionals with
multidisciplinary skills and experience required for undertaking this project. The EIA involved in
various stages of planning to final report preparation is given below in table:
Project Name: M/s. Meghmani Organics Ltd.

Green Circle Inc.
QCI-NABET Accredited
Name and address of Green Empire Anupushpam,
the Consultant Above Axis Bank, Near Yash
14th June 2021
Complex, Gotri Main Road
Personnel involved in Mr. Pradeep Joshi (EIA Coordinator)
preparation of EIA/EMP
report Mr. Pradeep Joshi (FAE- NV, AP,SHW,RH)
EIA COORDINATOR
Name Mr. Pradeep Joshi

Signature & Date

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS
Functional Areas Name of Involvement (Period & Task**) Signature & Date
the Expert
Meteorology, air Mr. Pradeep Site visit, finalization of monitoring locations,
quality modelling, Joshi checking air quality data, evaluation of
and prediction results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
(AQ) (AAQM), supervision of air quality modeling
and prediction, identification of impacts,
suggestion and finalization of mitigation
measures with client, and contribution to EIA
documentation.
Water Pollution Miss. Site visit and finalization of sampling
(WP) Sheetal locations for water sampling, water balance
Parmar for the project, evaluation of water pollution
control management, identification of
impacts, suggestion and finalization of
mitigation measures, contribution to EIA
documentation.
Water Pollution Mr. Sumant Finalization of sampling locations for water
(WP) Kuvar sampling, water balance for the project,
evaluation of water pollution control
management, identification of impacts,
suggestion and finalization of mitigation
measures, contribution to EIA
documentation.
Solid and Mr. Pradeep Identification of the waste generated from
Hazardous waste Joshi the industry, studying adequacy of mitigation
Management measures for management of hazardous
(SHW) waste, contribution to EIA document.
Socio-Economic Mr. Gunesh Secondary data collection, site visit,

(SE) Deosthali evaluation of Socio-Economic status of the
study area, assessment of the possible
changes to socio-economic issues arising
out of the proposed activity, contribution to
the EIA documentation.
Noise and Mr. Pradeep Supervision of noise sampling programme,
Vibration (NV) Joshi analysis of data, noise modeling,
identification of impacts and mitigation
measures, contribution to EIA
documentation.
Risk & hazard Mr. Pradeep Identification of modeling scenarios,
(RH) Joshi consequence modeling using PHAST,
finalization of DMP, contribution to RA /
DMP documentation.

Team members
Sr. No Name Signature

1 Mr. Bhupendra Singh Rajpurohit
2 Mrs. Hemlata Jangid
3 Ms. Sonakshi Rathore
4 Ms. Rita Jaishwal
5 Mr. Shamik Patel
6 Mr. Dhruv Panchal


Meghmani Pigment

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Meghmani Pigment

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Meghmani Pigment

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UID: GCI/EIA/FR/A (5F)/G003-21/2021-22/R1/4

Dated 12th April, 2021

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

FOR PROPOSED EXPANSION PROJECT

MANUFACTURING OF ORGANIC PIGMENTS

Conducted & Prepared by

GREEN CIRCLE, INC.

Integrated HSEQR Consulting Engineers, Scientists & Trainers

WE EXPRESS OUR SINCERE THANKS TO MANAGEMENT & EMPLOYEES OF M/S

per Terms of Reference (ToR) prescribed wide Letter No.: No.IA-J-11011/194/2020-IA-

The above stated fact is true to the best of my knowledge.

Date: 09/04/2021 Name of Director- Mr. Anand Patel

Sr. Environment Mitigation Measures Compliance

3 Solvent Air Pollutant i) Solvent recovery system with

4 Solvent Air Pollutant i) Carry out workplace area

5 Flange joints Air pollutant i) Routine &periodic inspection to

ii) Continuous monitoring of effluent Complied.

Chapter 2 Project Description………………………………………………...15

Chapter 3 Description of the Environment……………………… ………….75

Chapter 4 Anticipated Impacts & Mitigation Measures……………………123

Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives…………………………………………..154

Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Program……………………………….156

Chapter 7 Addition Studies…………………………………………………...164

Chapter 8 Project Benefits…………………………………………………...227

Chapter 9 Environment Cost Benefit Analysis……………………………..231

Chapter 10 Environment Management Plan……………………………….232

Chapter 11 Summary & Conclusion…………………………………………253

Chapter 12 Disclosure of Consultants………………………………………261

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Structure of the Report

Chapter 12 (Disclosure of This chapter presents the details of the consultant.

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

EMC Environmental Management Cell

ToR & Its Compliance

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

Project benefits focus on those points

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four Details of the project

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |

Sr. ToR Points Brief Explanation of Compliance Compliance Status

PROJECT PROPONENT ENVIRONMENT CONSULTANT Page |